You are on page 1of 169

 

Pearson  Edexcel  Level  3  Advanced  


Subsidiary  GCE  in  Economics  A  (8EC0)  
 

 
Course  Companion  
 
THEME  2:    
THE  UK  ECONOMY  –  
PERFORMANCE  AND  POLICIES    

 
Geoff  Riley  
 
 
 

 
 
   
A  Level  Economics  Year  1  (AS)  Macro  Topics  
 
This  Course  Companion  for  the  macroeconomics  content  for  the  Year  1  (AS)  Economics  
specification  is  organised  into  the  following  core  topics:    
 
1.   Introducing  Macroeconomics  ....................................................................................................................  3  
2.   Use  of  Index  Numbers  ...............................................................................................................................  6  
3.   The  Circular  Flow  of  Income  ......................................................................................................................  8  
4.   Measuring  National  Income  ....................................................................................................................  10  
5.   Standard  of  Living  and  Well-­‐Being  ..........................................................................................................  15  
6.   What  are  the  Objectives  of  Macroeconomic  Policy?  ..............................................................................  22  
7.   Aggregate  Demand  ..................................................................................................................................  23  
8.   Consumer  Spending  ................................................................................................................................  27  
9.   Household  Saving  ....................................................................................................................................  33  
10.   Capital  Investment  .................................................................................................................................  36  
11.   Understanding  Aggregate  Supply  ..........................................................................................................  39  
12.   Macroeconomic  Equilibrium  ..................................................................................................................  47  
13.   The  Economic  Cycle  ...............................................................................................................................  51  
14.   Multiplier  and  Accelerator  Effects  .........................................................................................................  59  
15.   Economic  Growth  ...................................................................................................................................  63  
16.   Inflation  ..................................................................................................................................................  72  
17.   Deflation  ................................................................................................................................................  83  
18.   Employment  and  Unemployment  ..........................................................................................................  86  
19.   Labour  Migration  and  Macroeconomic  Performance  in  the  UK  ............................................................  98  
20.   Introduction  to  Globalisation  and  International  Trade  ........................................................................  101  
21.   The  Balance  of  Payments  .....................................................................................................................  109  
22.   Monetary  Policy  ...................................................................................................................................  115  
23.   Exchange  Rates  ....................................................................................................................................  124  
24.   Fiscal  Policy  ..........................................................................................................................................  128  
25.   Supply-­‐side  Policies  ..............................................................................................................................  144  
26.   Keynesian  Economics  ...........................................................................................................................  155  
27.   Strengths  and  Weaknesses  of  Demand  Side  Policies  ...........................................................................  157  
28.   Possible  Conflicts  between  Macro  Objectives  .....................................................................................  158  
29.   AS  Macro  Glossary  ...............................................................................................................................  162  
 
 

Page  2     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
1. Introducing  Macroeconomics  
 
What  is  Macroeconomics?  
Macroeconomics  considers  the  economy  as  a  whole  
• Macroeconomics  studies  relationships  and  connections  between  one  country  and  another  for  
example,  how  a  slowdown  in  the  Chinese  economy  can  affect  UK  businesses.    
• Or  how  a  change  in  the  exchange  rate  affects  British  firms  exporting  to  countries  around  the  world  
• The  scope  of  macroeconomics  includes  looking  at  the  success  or  failure  of  government  policies  –  
for  example  does  the  government  have  effective  and  fair  policies  for  cutting  unemployment?  Or  
has  the  government  succeeded  in  creating  the  conditions  for  a  sustainable  and  balanced  recovery?  
• Macroeconomics  involves  looking  at  some  big  numbers!  GDP  is  a  good  example,  or  figures  for  a  
country’s  balance  of  payments.    
• Macroeconomics  involves  studying  inflation,  economic  growth,  human  development,  international  
trade  and  globalisation.  These  are  BIG  topics  and  BIG  issues  –  welcome  to  macro!  
 

   
   
The  City  of  London  is  a  centre  for  global  finance  and   The  spending  decisions  of  millions  of  consumers  
a  major  source  of  income  for  our  balance  of   add  up  to  affect  the  performance  of  the  economy  –  
payments  but  it  has  been  hit  hard  by  a  deep  crisis  in   a  fall  in  consumer  spending  nearly  always  leads  to  a  
banking  and  related  financial  services   downturn  
   

   
   
Searching  for  work  –  unemployment  has  been  rising   Businesses  need  to  forecast  demand  changes  –  
quickly  during  the  recent  recession  –  how  best  can   what  might  happen  to  sales  and  profits  if  there  is  a  
an  UK  reduce  the  level  of  unemployment?   severe  downturn  in  the  Chinese  economy?  

Page  3     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
Households,  Businesses,  Government  and  the  Trade  Sector  
In  macroeconomics  we  look  at  things  ‘in  the  whole’  and,  in  doing  so,  we  use  these  terms:  
• Households:  receive  income  through  wages  and  salaries  from  their  jobs  and  from  their  investments  
and  then  buy  the  output  of  firms  (this  is  known  as  consumer  spending  and  is  labelled  as  C)  
• Firms:  Businesses  hire  land,  labour  and  capital  inputs  when  making  products  for  which  they  pay  
wages  and  rent  (income).  Firms  receive  payment  from  consumers  and  profitable  businesses  may  
invest  (I)  a  percentage  of  profits  in  new  producer  goods  such  as  equipment  and  technology  
• Government:  collect  taxes  (T)  to  fund  spending  on  public  services  such  as  education,  healthcare  
and  defence.  Government  spending  is  given  the  label  (G)  
• International  sector:  The  UK  buys  imports  from  other  countries,  (M)  and  overseas  businesses  and  
consumers  buy  UK  products  –  known  as  exports  (X).  International  trade  is  important  for  the  UK.  
Millions  of  jobs  depend  directly  or  indirectly  on  the  UK  remaining  competitive  in  overseas  markets  
 
A  Selection  of  Key  Economic  Indicators  for  the  UK  
The  table  below  provides  an  overview  of  some  of  the  main  macroeconomic  indicators  for  the  UK  economy.    
 
Economic  Indicator   2014   2015*   2016*  
Real  gross  domestic  product  (GDP)  %  change   3.0   2.4   2.3  
Real  GDP  levels  (2014=100)   100.0   102.4   104.8  
Output  gap  (per  cent  of  potential  GDP)   -­‐1.0   -­‐0.6   -­‐0.4  
Expenditure  components  of  GDP    
     
Household  consumption  (%  change)   2.5   3.0   2.5  
General  government  consumption  (%  change)   1.6   1.2   0.5  
Business  investment  (%  change)   8.0   6.0   7.2  
General  government  investment  (%  change)   3.4   2.4   -­‐0.1  
:
Net  trade  (exports  -­‐  imports)  (per  cent  of  GDP)   -­‐0.6   -­‐0.5   -­‐0.4  
Inflation  
     
Consumer  price  index  (annual  %  change)   1.5   0.1   1.1  
The  Labour  Market  
     
Employment  (millions)   30.7   31.2   31.5  
Average  earnings  (annual  %  change)   2.6   2.2   3.6  
Labour  Force  Survey  unemployment  (%  rate)   6.2   5.4   5.1  
Claimant  Count  Unemployment  (millions)   1.04   0.78   0.73  
 
*  Data  for  2015  and  2016  is  a  forecast  using  data  published  at  the  time  of  the  July  2015  Budget  (Source:  
Office  for  Budgetary  Responsibility)  
 
Macroeconomic  stability  
• Macroeconomic  stability  describes  a  situation  where  the  key  macro  variables  such  as  growth,  
inflation,  interest  rates  and  investment  do  not  change  much  from  time  to  time.    
The  UK  economy  has  enjoyed  macro  stability  in  the  last  few  years.  Economic  growth  has  been  above  2%  per  
year,  inflation  has  remained  low  and  unemployment  has  been  falling.  But  our  trade  deficit  has  been  getting  

Page  4     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
bigger  and  there  remain  some  underlying  long-­‐term  problems  such  as  unaffordable  housing  and  rising  
levels  of  income  inequality.  
 
How  do  we  measure  the  economic  performance  of  developed  and  developing  countries?  
• Macroeconomic  performance  is  how  well  a  country  is  doing  in  reaching  objectives  of  policy.  
• The  main  aims  are  macroeconomic  policies  are  to  improve  outcomes  in  these  indicators:  
1. Jobs  –  how  high  is  unemployment?  Is  the  economy  creating  enough  new  jobs  for  people  entering  
the  labour  market  each  year?  Are  there  sufficient  opportunities  for  people  looking  for  work?  
2. Prices  –are  price  rises  under  control?  Can  the  economy  avoid  a  period  of  price  deflation?  Price  
stability  refers  to  low,  stable,  positive  inflation  of  between  1-­‐3%  per  year.  
3. Trade  –  is  the  economy  performing  well  in  trading  goods  and  services  with  other  countries?  How  
competitive  are  British  businesses  in  the  global  economy?  
4. Growth  –  how  successful  has  the  country  been  in  achieving  growth  and  in  laying  the  foundations  
for  future  expansion  and  development  
5. Development  -­‐  the  expansion  of  people’s  freedom  to  live  long,  healthy  and  creative  lives  
6. Efficiency  -­‐  is  the  economy  improving  productivity  so  that  more  goods  and  services  can  be  supplied  
at  lower  cost?  Are  we  cutting  the  amount  of  energy  we  use  per  unit  of  output?  
7. Public  services  –  have  the  benefits  of  growth  flowed  through  into  better  provision  of  state  services  
such  as  education,  law  and  order,  the  National  Health  Service  and  transport?  
8. The  environment  –  whether  economic  growth  is  sustainable  in  terms  of  environmental  impact.  
9. Inequality  of  income  and  wealth  -­‐  leaving  aside  changes  in  average  living  standards,  has  the  
economy  made  progress  in  achieving  an  acceptable  distribution  of  income  and  wealth?  Or  has  the  
gap  between  lower  and  higher-­‐income  families  become  wider  causing  higher  relative  poverty?  
 
The  macroeconomic  performance  of  any  one  nation  is  affected  by  events,  policies  and  shocks  in  other  
countries.  No  economy  is  immune  to  what  is  happening  in  the  global  financial  and  economic  system.    
 
Share  of  global  GDP  for  a  selection  of  countries  (per  cent,  PPP  adjusted)  in  2014  
 
18.0%   16.86%  
16.1%  
16.0%  
Share  in  global  GDP  (per  cent)  

14.0%  

12.0%  

10.0%  

8.0%   7.11%  

6.0%  
4.3%  
4.0%   3.39%   3.07%   2.9%  
2.35%   2.34%  
2.0%  

0.0%  
China   USA   India   Japan   Germany   Russia   Brazil   United   France  
Kingdom  
 
Page  5     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
2. Use  of  Index  Numbers  
Introduction  to  index  numbers  
• Index  numbers  are  a  useful  way  of  expressing  economic  data  time  series  and  comparing  /  
contrasting  information  
• An  index  number  is  a  figure  reflecting  price  or  quantity  compared  with  a  base  value  
• The  base  value  always  has  an  index  number  of  100    
• The  index  number  is  then  expressed  as  100  times  the  ratio  to  the  base  value  
• Note  that  index  numbers  have  no  units  e.g.  £,  Euros  or  $  
Examples  of  economic  data  in  index  number  format  
• FTSE-­‐100  Share  Index  
• Consumer  Prices  Index  (CPI)  
• Exchange  Rate  Index  
• Index  of  House  Prices  or  Index  of  Property  Rents  
• Index  of  GDP  or  GNI  (Gross  National  income)  
• Human  Development  Index  (HDI)  
• Index  of  Production  in  Manufacturing  
 
Calculating  an  index  number  
• Index  number  in  Year  Y  =  (Data  Value  in  Year  Y  /  Base  Year  Value)*100  
 
Example  of  the  calculation  –  UK  house  prices  
 
Year   Average  UK  House  Price  (£s)   Index  of  UK  House  Prices  
(2007=100)  
2007   192,651   100.0  (Base  Year)  
2008   194,658   101.0  
2009   159,961   82.2  
2010   167,973   105.0  
2011   162,915   97.0  
2012   161,648   99.2  
2013   163,593   101.2  
 
   

Page  6     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
Consumer  Price  Index  
• The  consumer  price  index  is  the  main  measure  of  changes  in  the  cost  of  living  in  the  UK.    
• The  base  year  for  the  chart  below  is  2005  and  shows  that  –  on  average,  prices  in  2014  were  28%  
higher  in  2014  than  they  had  been  in  2005.  It  also  shows  that  inflation  in  2015  was  close  to  zero  as  
the  CPI  remained  at  128.  
Consumer  Price  Index  (CPI)  in  the  United  Kingdom  from  2000  to  2015  
   
140  

128   128  
130   126.1  
123  
119.6  
120  
Index  (2005=100)  

114.5  
110.8  
108.5  
110   104.7  
102.3  
100  
98  
100   95.4   96.7  
93.1   94.2  

90  

80  
2000   2001   2002   2003   2004   2005   2006   2007   2008   2009   2010   2011   2012   2013   2014   2015  
 
 
Index  numbers  can  be  used  to  calculate  percentage  changes.  The  chart  below  shows  the  forecast  rate  of  
inflation  for  the  UK  economy  using  data  published  in  the  July  2015  Budget  by  the  Office  for  Budgetary  
Responsibility.  
 
Forecasted  percentage  change  of  the  consumer  price  index  (CPI)  in  the  United  Kingdom  from  2015  to  2020  
 
2.5%  

2%  
2.0%   1.9%  
1.8%  
1.6%  
Percentage  change  

1.5%  

1.1%  
1.0%  

0.5%  

0.1%  
0.0%  
2015   2016   2017   2018   2019   2020  

   

Page  7     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
3. The  Circular  Flow  of  Income  
What  is  the  circular  flow?  
• This  is  a  basic  way  of  understanding  how  different  parts  of  the  economy  fit  together  
• The  circular  flow  of  income  and  spending  shows  connections  between  different  sectors  
• It  shows  flows  of  goods  and  services  and  incomes  to  factors  of  production  
• The  circular  flow  shows  how  national  income  or  Gross  Domestic  Product  can  be  calculated  
• Businesses  produce  goods  and  services  and  in  the  process  of  doing  so,  incomes  are  generated  for  
factors  of  production  (land,  labour,  capital  and  enterprise)    
What  are  injections  into  the  circular  flow?  
There  are  three  types  of  injection  of  extra  spending  into  the  circular  flow  model.    
• Investment  spending  
• Exports  of  goods  and  services  
• Government  spending  
What  are  leakages  (withdrawals)  from  the  circular  flow  
Not  all  income  will  flow  from  households  to  businesses  directly.    
The  circular  flow  shows  that  some  part  of  household  income  will  be:    
1. Put  aside  for  future  spending,  i.e.  savings  (S)  in  banks  accounts  and  other  types  of  deposit  
2. Paid  to  the  government  in  taxation  (T)  e.g.  income  tax  and  national  insurance  
3. Spent  on  foreign-­‐made  goods  and  services,  i.e.  imports  (M)  which  flow  into  the  economy  
Withdrawals  are  increases  in  savings,  taxes  or  imports  so  reducing  the  circular  flow  of  income  and  leading  
to  a  multiplied  contraction  of  production  (output)  
 
The  Domestic  Circular  Flow  of  Income  and  Spending  Diagram  
 

 
   

Page  8     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
The  Circular  Flow  of  Income  and  Spending  with  the  External  Sector  added  
 

 
 
 
Macroeconomic  equilibrium  
• An  economy  is  in  equilibrium  when  the  rate  of  injections  =  the  rate  of  withdrawals    
• A  rise  in  net  injections  will  lead  to  an  expansion  of  national  output  and  income  
• A  rise  in  net  leakages  will  bring  about  a  contraction  of  national  output  and  income  
Net  trade  balances  and  injections  /  leakages  
• When  the  value  of  exports  >  the  value  of  imports,  a  country  is  running  a  trade  surplus  and  this  is  a  
net  injection  into  the  circular  flow  
• When  the  value  of  exports  <  the  value  of  imports,  a  country  is  running  a  trade  deficit  and  this  is  a  
net  leakage  from  the  circular  flow  
The  Budget  Balance  and  the  Circular  Flow  
• When  a  government  is  running  an  expansionary  fiscal  policy  and  operating  with  a  bigger  budget  
deficit,  government  spending  is  greater  than  tax  revenues,  i.e.  injections  into  the  circular  flow  will  
be  higher  than  leakages,  this  will  cause  a  rise  in  equilibrium  national  output  
• At  a  time  of  fiscal  austerity  when  a  government  is  seeking  to  reduce  the  size  of  the  budget  deficit,  
leakages  from  taxation  will  rising  and/or  injections  from  government  spending  will  be  falling.  The  
net  effect  of  a  reduction  in  the  budget  deficit  is  to  cause  a  contraction  of  national  output.  

Page  9     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
4. Measuring  National  Income  
 
What  is  National  Income?  
• National  income  measures  the  monetary  value  of  the  flow  of  output  of  goods  and  services  
produced  in  an  economy  over  a  period  of  time.    
Measuring  the  level  and  rate  of  growth  of  national  income  (Y)  is  important  for  keeping  track  of:  
• The  rate  of  economic  growth  
• Changes  to  living  standards  
• Changes  to  the  distribution  of  income  between  groups  within  the  population  
 
Gross  Domestic  Product  
• Gross  domestic  product  (GDP)  is  the  total  value  of  output  produced  in  a  given  time  period  
• GDP  includes  the  output  of  foreign  owned  businesses  that  are  located  in  a  nation  following  foreign  
direct  investment.  For  example,  the  output  from  the  Nissan  car  plant  in  the  north  east  contributes  
to  UK  GDP  
There  are  three  ways  of  calculating  GDP  -­‐  all  of  which  in  theory  should  sum  to  the  same  amount:  
 
National  Output  =  National  Expenditure  (Aggregate  Demand)  =  National  Income  
 
(i)  The  Expenditure  Method  -­‐  Aggregate  Demand  (AD)    
 
The  full  equation  for  GDP  using  this  approach  is    
 
GDP  =  C  +  I  +  G  +  (X-­‐M)  where  
C:  Household  spending  on  goods  and  services  
I:  Capital  Investment  spending  
G:  Government  spending    
X:  Exports  of  Goods  and  Services  
M:  Imports  of  Goods  and  Services  
 
The  Income  Method  –  adding  together  factor  incomes  
GDP  is  the  sum  of  the  incomes  earned  through  the  production  of  goods  and  services.  This  is:    
Income  from  people  in  jobs  and  in  self-­‐employment  (e.g.  wages  and  salaries)  
+  
Profits  of  private  sector  businesses    
+  
Rent  income  from  the  ownership  of  land  
=    
Gross  Domestic  product  (by  sum  of  factor  incomes)  
 
Only  those  incomes  that  are  come  from  the  production  of  goods  and  services  are  included  in  the  
calculation  of  GDP  by  the  income  approach.  We  exclude  from  the  calculation:  
• Transfer  payments  e.g.  the  state  pension;  income  support  for  families  on  low  incomes;  the  
Jobseekers’  Allowance  for  the  unemployed  and  other  welfare  assistance  such  housing  benefit  and  
incapacity  benefits  

Page  10     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
• Private  transfers  of  money  from  one  individual  to  another  
• Income  not  registered  with  the  tax  authorities  Every  year,  billions  of  pounds  worth  of  activity  is  
not  declared  to  the  tax  authorities.  This  is  known  as  the  shadow  economy.      
• Published  figures  for  GDP  by  factor  incomes  will  be  inaccurate  because  much  activity  is  not  officially  
recorded  –  including  subsistence  farming  and  barter  transactions  
 
The  Distinction  between  Income  and  Wealth  
 
Income   Wealth  
Income  is  a  flow  of  money  going  to  factors  of   Wealth  is  the  current  value  of  a  stock  of  assets  
production   owned  by  someone  or  society  as  a  whole  
Wages  and  salaries  from  jobs   Savings  in  bank  accounts  
Rental  income  from  property   Ownership  of  property  
Interest  from  savings   Shares  /  stocks  in  businesses  
Profits  flowing  to  shareholders   Wealth  held  in  pension  schemes  
 
Gross  Value  Added  and  Contributions  to  a  nation’s  GDP  
• There  are  three  main  wealth-­‐generating  sectors  in  an  economy  –  manufacturing  and  construction,  
primary  (including  oil&  gas,  farming,  forestry  &  fishing)  and  a  wide  range  of  service-­‐sector  
industries.    
• This  measure  of  GDP  adds  together  the  value  of  output  produced  by  each  of  the  productive  sectors  
in  the  economy  using  the  concept  of  value  added.    .    
Value  added  is  the  increase  in  the  value  of  goods  or  services  as  a  result  of  the  production  process  
 
Value  added  =  value  of  production  -­‐  value  of  intermediate  goods  
 
Say  you  buy  a  pizza  from  Dominos  for  £9.99.  This  is  the  retail  price  and  will  count  as  consumption.  The  
pizza  has  many  ingredients  at  stages  of  the  supply  chain  –  tomato  growers,  dough,  mushroom  farmers  and  
also  the  value  created  by  Dominos  as  they  put  the  pizza  together  and  deliver  to  the  consumer.    Some  
products  have  a  low  value-­‐added,  for  example  cheap  tee  shirts  selling  for  little  more  than  £5.  These  are  low  
cost,  high  volume,  low  priced  products.  Other  goods  and  services  are  such  that  lots  of  value  can  be  added  
as  we  move  from  sourcing  the  raw  materials  through  to  the  final  product.  Examples  include  designer  
jewellery,  perfumes,  meals  in  expensive  restaurants  and  sports  cars.  And  also  the  lucrative  video  games  
industry.  
 
GDP  by  Output  (Value  Added)  
• The  majority  of  UK  GDP  comes  from  service  industries  such  as  banking  and  finance,  tourism,  
retailing,  education  and  health.    
• In  2012,  the  service  sector  accounted  for  79%  of  economic  output,  the  manufacturing  sector  for  
10%  and  the  construction  sector  for  6%  
Manufacturing  
• Manufacturing  is  one  of  the  production  industries,  which  also  include  mining;  electricity;  water  and  
waste  management;  and  oil  and  gas  extraction.    
• Production  industries  accounted  for  16%  of  UK  output  in  2013.  Many  jobs  have  been  lost  in  
manufacturing  and  construction  in  recent  years.    
• In  2013  there  were  2.6  million  jobs  in  manufacturing,  8%  of  all  jobs  in  the  UK  
Page  11     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
• Manufacturing  and  service  industries  are  linked  For  example  the  health  of  a  car  exporting  business  
will  have  a  direct  bearing  on  demand,  output,  profits  and  jobs  in  many  service  businesses  such  as  
transportation,  design,  marketing  and  vehicle  retailing.      
• Equally  service  businesses  such  as  online  banking  require  plenty  of  physical  inputs  such  as  
machinery  and  infrastructure  to  be  successful.  
Service  sector  industries  
The  main  service  sector  industries  in  the  UK  are:  
• Hotels  and  restaurants,  and  a  range  of  services  provided  by  local  government    
• Transport,  logistics,  storage  and  communication    
• Business  services  and  finance,  motor  trade,  wholesale  trades  and  retail  trade      
• Land  transport    and  air  transport,  post  and  telecommunications  
• Real  estate  activities,  computer  and  related  activities,  Education,  Health  and  social  work    
• Sewage  and  refuse  disposal  
• Recreational,  cultural  and  sporting  activities  
 
Gross  National  Income  (GNI)  
• Gross  National  Income  (GNI)  measures  the  final  value  of  incomes  flowing  to  UK  owned  factors  of  
production  whether  they  are  located  in  the  UK  or  overseas.    
• Gross  Domestic  Income  is  concerned  only  with  the  incomes  generated  within  the  geographical  
boundaries  of  the  country.  For  example  the  value  of  the  output  produced  by  Toyota  in  the  UK  
counts  towards  British  GDP  but  some  of  the  profits  made  by  overseas  companies  with  production  
plants  here  in  the  UK  are  sent  back  to  their  country  of  origin  –  adding  to  their  GNP.  
GNI  =  GDP  +  Net  property  income  from  abroad  (NPIA)  
• NPIA  is  the  net  balance  of  interest,  profits  and  dividends  (IPD)  coming  into  the  UK  from  our  assets  
owned  overseas  matched  against  the  flow  of  profits  and  other  income  from  foreign  owned  assets  
located  in  the  UK.    
• There  has  been  an  increasing  flow  of  foreign  direct  investment  (FDI)  into  and  out  of  the  UK.  Many  
foreign  firms  have  set  up  production  plants  here  whilst  UK  firms  have  become  multinationals  
Remittances  and  Gross  National  Income  
• Remittances  are  transfers  of  money  across  national  boundaries  by  migrant  workers.  Despite  a  dip  
because  of  the  global  recession,  remittance  flows  have  grown  in  the  world  economy  over  the  
longer-­‐term  as  the  scale  of  migration  between  countries  has  grown.    
• For  many  developing  countries,  money  coming  in  from  remittances  is  an  importance  source  of  
income  adding  to  their  Gross  National  Income  (GNI)  
• The  top  recipients  of  migrant  remittances  in  2012  were  India  ($70  billion),  China  ($66  billion),  the  
Philippines  ($24  billion),  Mexico  ($24  billion),  and  Nigeria  ($21  billion).    
• The  size  of  remittance  flows  to  developing  countries  is  now  more  than  three  times  that  of  official  
development  assistance  (aid).    
• The  United  States  accounted  for  the  highest  portion  of  remittances  sent  to  other  coutneries  in  
2014  with  approximately  $131  billion.  Saudi  Arabia's  large  migrant  workforce  saw  it  send  $45  
billion  in  remittances  in  2014  while  the  UAE  remitted  $29  billion.  
   

Page  12     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Nominal  and  Real  GDP  -­‐  Measuring  Real  National  Income  
• Nominal  income  measures  income  at  current  prices  with  no  adjustment  for  inflation  e.g.  if  nominal  
income  is  £40,000  in  2015  and  rises  by  5%  in  the  next  year,  then  nominal  income  will  rise  to  
£42,000  

Nominal   Real  
Monetary  values  
for  data  e.g.   Adjusted  for  
inflaton  
money  GDP  

Prices  held  at  


Not  inflaton   level  of  the  
adjusted  
chosen  base  year  

Data  expressed  
at  current  prices   Data  expressed  
at  constant  
(i.e.  today’s  
prices  
prices)  
 
• When  we  want  to  measure  growth  we  adjust  for  the  effects  of  inflation  and  consider  data  in  real  
terms  
• Real  GDP  measures  the  volume  of  output.  An  increase  in  real  output  means  that  AD  has  risen  
faster  than  the  rate  of  inflation  and  therefore  the  economy  is  experiencing  positive  growth.    
This  chart  shows  the  nominal  or  money  value  of  national  output  for  the  UK  economy  since  2000.  It  is  
expressed  at  current  prices  i.e.  it  has  not  been  adjusted  for  the  effects  of  rising  prices  (inflation).  
   
Nominal  (money)  value  of  UK  GDP  
 
2000000  

1800000  

1600000  

1400000  
 UK  GDP  in  £  million  

1200000  

1000000  

800000  

600000  

400000  

200000  

0  
00/01   01/02   02/03   03/04   04/05   05/06   06/07   07/08   08/09   09/10   10/11   11/12   12/13   13/14  
 
 
   

Page  13     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Data  on  the  Value  and  Growth  of  UK  GDP  and  for  Key  Industries  
   
Real  GDP   Real  GDP   Manufacturing   Construction   All  Services  
 
£  Million  at  
Per  cent  change   Per  cent  change   Per  cent  change   Per  cent  change  
Year   constant  2011  
year  on  year   year  on  year   year  on  year   year  on  year  
prices  
2007   1,637,432   2.6   0.7   2.2   3.1  

2008   1,631,995   -­‐0.3   -­‐2.9   -­‐2.6   0.6  

2009   1,561,646   -­‐4.3   -­‐9.4   -­‐13.2   -­‐2.9  

2010   1,591,494   1.9   4.7   8.5   1.4  

2011   1,617,677   1.6   1.8   2.2   2.1  

2012   1,628,338   0.7   -­‐1.3   -­‐7.5   2  

2013   1,655,447   1.7   -­‐0.7   1.4   1.9  

2014   1,704,998   3   3.1   9.5   3  


 
Purchasing  Power  Parity  (PPP)  Measures  of  National  Income  
• PPP  stands  for  purchasing  power  parity  
• PPP  measures  how  many  units  of  one  country’s  currency  are  needed  to  buy  exactly  the  same  
basket  of  goods  and  services  as  can  be  bought  with  a  given  amount  of  another  country’s  currency  
• In  countries  where  the  cost  of  living  is  relatively  high,  there  will  be  a  downward  adjustment  to  a  
nation’s  PPP-­‐adjusted  GDP  or  GNI  per  capita  
• Volatile  exchange  rates  can  have  a  big  effect  on  real  purchasing  power  of  $100  in  each  country  
   

Page  14     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
5. Standard  of  Living  and  Well-­‐Being  
What  is  meant  by  the  standard  of  living?  
• The  standard  of  living  measures  our  material  welfare  
• The  baseline  measure  is  real  national  output  per  head  of  population  or  real  GDP  per  capita  
• Real  income  per  capita  is  an  inaccurate  and  insufficient  indicator  of  living  standards  
• For  many  economists,  there  is  a  growing  disconnect  between  GDP  and  wellbeing  
Measuring  Per  Capita  Gross  National  Income  
• Income  per  capita  is  a  way  of  measuring  the  standard  of  living  for  the  inhabitants  of  a  country.    
• Real  GDP  Per  Capita  =  real  income  per  head  of  population  
• Real  Disposable  Income  =  income  after  deduction  of  taxes  +  addition  of  benefits  

Real  GDP  Per  Capita   Real  Household  Disposable  Income  


 
Year   Q1  2008  =  100   Q1  2008  =  100  
2007  Q1   98.6   101.0  
2008  Q1   100.0   100.0  
2009  Q1   93.5   99.1  
2010  Q1   93.6   102.4  
2011  Q1   94.8   99.1  
2012  Q1   95.1   98.4  
2013  Q1   95.4   98.6  
2014  Q1   97.3   97.7  
2015  Q1   99.4   101.4  
   
GDP  and  GNI  per  capita  
In  recent  years  UK  GNI  per  capita  has  fallen  below  GDP  per  capita  because  the  net  flow  of  investment  
income  has  become  negative.    It  has  also  taken  a  long  time  for  real  GDP  per  person  to  recover  ground  lost  
in  the  recession.  
 
7,000 1
£ per capita, at
6,800 0.9
constant 2011
6,600 prices 0.8
6,400 0.7
6,200 0.6
6,000 0.5
5,800 0.4
5,600 0.3
5,400 0.2
5,200 0.1
5,000 0
1997 Q1

1998 Q3
1999 Q2
2000 Q1

2001 Q3
2002 Q2
2003 Q1

2004 Q3
2005 Q2
2006 Q1

2007 Q3
2008 Q2
2009 Q1

2010 Q3
2011 Q2
2012 Q1

2013 Q3
2014 Q2
1997 Q4

2000 Q4

2003 Q4

2006 Q4

2009 Q4

2012 Q4

Real GNI per Capita Real GDP per capita


 
Page  15     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
 Data  on  Real  Per  Capita  GDP  for  European  Union  Nations  (2014)  
 
GDP  per  capita   GDP  per  capita  
  (Euros)     (Euros)  
Austria   34,900   Italy   26,500  
Belgium   32,500   Latvia   17,600  
Bulgaria   12,300   Lithuania   20,100  
Croatia   16,100   Luxembourg   74,300  
Cyprus   23,400   Malta   23,100  
Czech  Republic   22,900   Netherlands   36,000  
Denmark   33,900   Poland   18,600  
Estonia   19,900   Portugal   21,400  
Finland   30,200   Romania   14,600  
France   29,400   Slovakia   20,800  
Germany   33,800   Slovenia   22,600  
Greece   19,600   Spain   25,500  
Hungary   18,500   Sweden   34,100  
Ireland   36,100   United  Kingdom   29,600  
 
Countries  with  the  highest  per  capita  GDP  in  2015  
 

GDP  per  capita  in  U.S.  dollars  


0   20000   40000   60000   80000   100000   120000  
Luxembourg   96,268.65  
Switzerland   84,069.79  
Qatar   81,602.85  
Norway   80,748.9  
United  States   56,421.39  
Iceland   54,331.4  
Singapore   53,604.15  
Denmark   52,821.79  
Australia   52,454.12  
Sweden   49,582.12  
San  Marino   49,139.01  
Ireland   47,329.05  
Canada   45,028.93  
Austria   44,475.59  
Netherlands   44,249.48  
 
 
   

Page  16     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Problems  in  using  national  income  statistics  to  measure  living  standards  
1. Official  data  on  GDP  understates  the  growth  of  real  national  income  per  capita  over  time  due  to  the  
shadow  economy  and  the  value  of  unpaid  work  by  volunteers  and  people  caring  for  their  family  
2. The  "shadow  economy"  includes  illegal  activities  such  as  drug  production  and  distribution,  
prostitution,  theft,  fraud  and  concealed  legal  activities  such  as  tax  evasion  on  otherwise-­‐legitimate  
business  activities  such  as  un-­‐reported  self-­‐employment  income  
3. Often  official  GDP  data  is  inaccurate,  e.g.  many  countries  in  sub-­‐Saharan  Africa  do  not  update  their  
reporting  often  enough,  and  so  their  GDP  numbers  may  miss  large  and  fast-­‐growing  sectors,  like  
cell  phones.  In  2014  Nigeria  became  the  largest  economy  in  Africa  (over-­‐taking  South  Africa)  after  a  
fundamental  reassessment  of  their  GDP  calculation.  
4. Reasons  why  GDP  data  may  give  a  distorted  picture  of  living  standards  in  a  country:    
5. Regional  variations  in  income  and  spending:  National  data  can  hide  regional  variations  in  output,  
employment  and  income  per  head  of  the  population  
6. Inequalities  in  income  and  wealth:  Average  (mean)  incomes  might  rise  but  inequality  could  grow  
7. Leisure  and  working  hours  and  working  conditions:  An  increase  in  real  GDP  might  have  been  
achieved  at  the  expense  of  leisure  time  if  workers  are  working  longer  hours  or  if  working  conditions  
have  deteriorated  
8. Imbalances  between  consumption  and  investment:  High  levels  of  investment  as  a  share  of  GDP  
might  be  superb  for  creating  extra  capacity  to  produce  but  at  the  expense  of  consumer  goods  and  
services  for  the  current  generation  
9. Changes  in  life  expectancy:  Improvements  in  life  expectancy  don’t  always  show  through  in  GDP  
accounts.  Putting  a  monetary  value  on  the  benefits  of  increased  longevity  is  difficult  
10. The  value  of  non-­‐marketed  output:  Much  useful  and  valuable  work  is  not  sold  in  markets  at  
market  prices.  The  value  of  the  output  of  people  working  for  charities,  self-­‐help  groups  and  of  
housework  might  reasonably  be  added  to  national  income  statistics  
11. Innovation  and  the  development  of  new  products:  New  goods  and  services  become  available  
because  of  invention  and  innovation  that  simply  would  not  have  been  available  to  the  richest  
person  on  earth  less  than  fifty  years  ago.  About  half  of  what  we  spend  our  money  on  now  was  not  
invented  in  1870.  Examples  include  air  travel,  cars,  computers,  antibiotics,  hip  replacements,  insulin  
and  many  other  life-­‐enhancing  and  life-­‐saving  drugs  
12. Environmental  considerations:  Rising  output  might  have  been  accompanied  by  an  increase  in  air  
and  noise  pollution  and  other  externality  effects  that  have  a  negative  effect  on  our  social  welfare  
13. Defensive  expenditures:  Much  spending  is  to  protect  against  an  economic  or  social  bad  e.g.  crime,  
or  spending  to  clean  up  the  effects  of  pollution  and  waste    
Sex,  Drugs  and  GDP  in  the  UK  
• In  2014  the  UK  started  the  process  of  including  estimates  of  incomes  and  spending  from  the  
shadow  economy  in  the  GDP  figure  
• According  to  estimates,  sex  work  generated  £5.3bn  for  the  British  economy  in  2013  
• £4.4bn  came  from  the  sale  of  cannabis,  heroin,  powder  cocaine,  crack  cocaine,  ecstasy  and  
amphetamines  
• It  was  estimated  that  there  were  2.2  million  cannabis  users  in  the  UK  in  2009,  growing  cannabis  
worth  more  than  £1.2bn.  Half  was  home-­‐grown  –  costing  £154m  in  heat,  light  and  "raw  materials"  
to  produce  
   

Page  17     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
What  has  happened  to  Living  Standards  in  the  UK?  
 
There  are  two  measures  of  living  standards  shown  here  –  real  GDP  per  capita  and  also  real  household  
disposable  income  (RHDI)  
 
Index numbers, 2008Q1 = 100 106

GDP per Capita RHDI Per Capita


104

102

100

98

96

94

92

90
2007 Q2 2008 Q2 2009 Q1 2010 Q1 2011 Q4 2012 Q4 2013 Q3 2014 Q3 2015
Q1 Q1 Q1 Q1 Q1 Q1 Q1 Q1 Q1  
 
The  difference  between  economic  growth  and  economic  welfare  
 

Economic   Economic  
growth   welfare  
A  broader  measure  of  
Sustained  growth  of  real   well-­‐being  (social  +  
GDP  over  tme  
economic)  

Many  aspects  of  well-­‐


Contributes  to  rising   being  are  not  material  
living  standards  as  per   aspects  of  life  -­‐  and  are  
capita  incomes  grow   not  measured  by  GDP  
statstcs  

Welfare  measure  might  


Long  run  growth  is  an   include  changes  in  
increase  in    a  country’s   income  and  wealth  
productve  potental   inequality  +  trends  in  
median  incomes  
 
 
GDP  as  the  traditional  yardstick  for  measuring  living  standards  has  come  under  pressure.  Economic  
wellbeing  is  a  multi-­‐dimensional  concept  and  covers  a  much  wider  range  of  indicators:  
Page  18     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
Real  Gross  Domestc  Product  per  capita  

Real  Household  Spending  per  head  

Median  Household  Income  

Household  Net  Wealth  (i.e.  value  of  assets  –  liabilites)  

Unemployment  rate  (household  income  and  net  wealth.  

Financial  situaton  of  households    +  feeling  of  security  

 
Median  Incomes  
• Household  income  measures  the  flow  of  income  that  finds  its  way  to  households  each  year.  
• The  median  is  better  than  the  mean  since  it  is  reflective  of  progress  in  the  middle  of  the  income  
distribution.  For  example,  increases  in  GDP  that  go  solely  to  the  rich  would  not  increase  this  
measure.  
• Looking  at  median  income  would  create  more  focus  on  inclusive  growth  that  generates  wider  
benefits.  
Links  between  real  incomes  and  subjective  happiness  
• Traditional  economic  theory  assumed  a  positive  relationship  between  income  and  happiness  
• Standards  measures  of  progress  such  as  GDP  per  capita  are  increasingly  considered  an  incomplete  
picture  of  the  state  of  the  nation  
• Plenty  of  evidence  that  happiness  does  not  increase  beyond  a  certain  income  threshold  
• The  Easterlin  Paradox  emerged  in  the  1970s  associated  with  US  economist  Richard  Easterlin  
• The  Easterlin  Paradox  concerns  whether  we  are  actually  happier  and  more  contented  as  our  living  
standards  improve  over  time  
The  Easterlin  Paradox  
• Within  a  society,  rich  people  tend  to  be  much  happier  than  poor  people.  
• But,  rich  societies  tend  not  to  be  happier  than  poor  societies  (or  not  by  much).  
• As  countries  get  richer,  they  do  not  get  happier.  
• Easterlin  argued  that  life  satisfaction  does  rise  with  average  incomes  but  only  up  to  a  point.  Beyond  
that  the  marginal  gain  in  happiness  declines.  
• One  of  Easterlin’s  conclusions  was  that  someone’s  relative  income  weighs  heavily  on  people’s  
minds.  
• Faced  with  this  choice  what  would  you  rather  have?  
o You  get  £5,000  and  a  friend  gets  £3,000  or  
o You  get  £10,000  and  a  friend  gets  £15,000  
   

Page  19     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Data  on  Income  Satisfaction  in  the  UK  from  2006-­‐2012  
• To  what  extent  has  the  slow  recovery  in  Britain  affected  measured  economic  wellbeing?  
• 2009  was  a  year  of  recession  and  the  following  years  saw  a  delayed,  slow  recovery  including  the  
start  of  a  period  of  fiscal  austerity  (rising  taxes  and  deep  cuts  in  government  spending)  
• The  percentage  of  people  somewhat,  mostly  or  completely  satisfied  with  their  income  has  declined  
from  60.2%  in  2007  to  43.4%  in  2012.  

Satisfaction  with  current  


2006   2007   2008   2009   2010   2011   2012  
income  (%  of  responses)  
Completely  satisfied   9.7   9.6   8.5   8.6   9.3   7.0   8.7  

Mostly  satisfied   20.7   22.4   20.4   28.7   28.6   26.7   27.9  

Somewhat  satisfied   28.0   28.2   29.5   19.9   19.4   18.9   16.9  

Somewhat  dissatisfied   12.0   11.3   11.9   14.8   15.1   16.2   15.3  

Mostly  dissatisfied   5.6   5.2   5.3   8.1   8.3   11.8   11.1  

Completely  dissatisfied   3.7   3.2   3.6   5.8   5.6   6.1   6.7  

Somewhat,  mostly  or  


58.4   60.2   58.5   57.2   57.3   52.6   53.4  
completely  satisfied  
 
Some  Strategies  to  Improve  Living  Standards  
• Living  standards  improve  when  an  economy  is  able  to  sustain  a  rise  in  real  per  capita  incomes  over  
the  long  run  and  when  the  benefits  of  growth  are  widely  spread  
• Some  policy  ideas  for  improving  the  standard  of  living  are  summarised  in  the  graphic  below  

Incentves  to  increase   A  living  wage  to  boost  


Improving  human  capital   employment   productvity  

Accessible  +  high  quality   Bewer  /  affordable  housing   Wealth  from  successful  


public  services   to  rent  &  buy   businesses  

 
Page  20     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
Persistent  low  pay  and  low  living  standards  
One  of  the  main  barriers  for  people  to  raise  their  living  standards  is  the  high  percentage  of  people  in  work  
who  are  poorly  paid  –  the  chart  below  shows  the  percentage  shares  of  a  selection  of  occupation  groups  
earning  below  the  Living  Wage  in  Great  Britain  in  April  2013.  
 

Share  earning  below  Living  Wage  


0.0%   10.0%   20.0%   30.0%   40.0%   50.0%   60.0%   70.0%  

Elementary  occupatons   59%  

Sales  &  customer  service   55%  

Personal  services   35%  

Process,  plant  &  machinery  operatves   23%  

Skilled  trades   17%  

Admin  &  secretarial   14%  

Managers  &  senior  officials   5%  

Associate  professional  &  technical   4%  

Professional   1%  
 
 
The  pay  gap  between  skilled  and  unskilled  workers  is  actually  greater  in  UK  than  anywhere  else  in  the  OECD    
 
Median  gross  full-­‐time  annual  salary  for  the  highest  earning  occupations  in  the  UK  as  of  November  2014  
 

Median  gross  annual  earnings  in  GBP  


0   20000   40000   60000   80000   100000  

Aircraz  pilots  and  flight  engineers   90,420  

Chief  executves  and  senior  officials   81,521  

Air  traffic  controllers   79,874  

Medical  practtoners   71,141  

Marketng  and  sales  directors   70,742  

Informaton  technology  and  telecommunicatons   64,511  

Financial  managers  and  directors   61,108  

Senior  police  officers   57,896  

Financial  insttuton  managers  and  directors   53,621  

Senior  professionals  of  educatonal  establishments   50,367  

   

Page  21     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
6. What  are  the  Objectives  of  Macroeconomic  Policy?  
 

Price  Stability  (CPI  Inflakon   Growth  of  Real  GDP   Falling  Unemployment  /  
of  2%)   (Nakonal  Output)   Raising  Employment  

Higher  Average  Living  


Standards  (nakonal  income   Stable  Balance  of  Payments   An  Equitable  Distribukon  of  
on  the  Current  Account   Income  and  Wealth  
per  capita)  
 
 
What  are  objectives  of  macroeconomic  policy?  
• Objectives  are  the  goals  of  government  policy  
• Instruments  are  the  means  by  which  these  aims  might  be  achieved  
Additional  macroeconomic  objectives  
 

Balancing  the  budget  and   Improving  economic   Beler  regional  balance  in  
reducing  the  nakonal  debt   well-­‐being   the  UK  economy  

Improved  access  to   Improved   Environmental  


public  services   compekkveness   sustainability  
 
 
The  importance  attached  to  each  of  these  macroeconomic  objectives  will  change  over  time  and  will  vary  
across  countries  depending  on  their  stage  of  economic  development.  
Page  22     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
7. Aggregate  Demand  
 
Growth  Rates  for  the  Components  of  Aggregate  Demand  in  the  UK  
Consumption     Government   Exports   Imports  
Investment  (I)  
  (C)   Spending  (G)   (X)   (M)  
Year   Per  cent   Per  cent   Per  cent   Per  cent   Per  cent  
2008   -­‐0.5   2.0   -­‐4.7   1.6   -­‐1.8  
2009   -­‐3.3   1.2   -­‐14.4   -­‐8.2   -­‐9.8  
2010   0.5   0.0   5.9   6.2   8.7  
2011   -­‐0.1   0.0   2.3   5.6   1.0  
2012   1.5   2.3   0.7   0.7   3.1  
2013   1.7   -­‐0.3   3.4   1.5   1.4  
2014   2.6   1.6   8.6   0.5   2.4  
 
The  Characteristics  of  Aggregate  Demand  
• Aggregate  demand  (AD)  =  total  spending  on  goods  and  services  
AD  =  C  +  I  +  G  +  (X-­‐M)  
• C:  Consumers'  expenditure  on  goods  and  services:  Also  known  as  consumption,  this  includes  
demand  for  durables  e.g.  audio-­‐visual  equipment  &  non-­‐durable  goods  such  as  food  and  drinks    
• I:  Capital  Investment  –  This  is  spending  by  businesses  and  the  government  on  capital  goods  such  as  
plant  and  equipment,  technology  and  new  buildings  to  produce  consumer  goods  in  the  future.    
o Capital  investment  spending  accounts  for  between  15-­‐20%  of  GDP  in  any  given  year.    
o Of  this  investment,  75%  comes  from  private  sector  businesses  such  as  Tesco,  British  
Airways  and  British  Petroleum  and  the  remainder  is  spent  by  the  government  –  for  example  
building  new  schools  or  in  improving  rail  or  road  networks.    
o Investment  has  important  effects  on  the  supply-­‐side  as  well  as  being  a  component  of  AD.    
o A  small  part  of  investment  is  the  change  in  the  value  of  stocks.  Producers  may  find  either  
than  demand  is  running  higher  than  output  (i.e.  stocks  will  fall)  or  that  demand  is  weaker  
than  expected  and  below  current  output  (in  which  case  the  value  of  stocks  will  rise.)  
• G:  Government  Spending  –  This  is  spending  on  state-­‐provided  goods  and  services  including  public  
goods  and  merit  goods.  Decisions  on  how  much  the  government  will  spend  each  year  are  affected  
by  developments  in  the  economy  and  the  political  priorities  of  the  government.    
o Government  spending  on  goods  and  services  is  around  18-­‐20%  of  GDP  but  this  tends  to  
understate  the  true  size  of  the  government  sector  in  the  economy.  Firstly  some  spending  is  
on  investment  and  a  sizeable  amount  goes  on  welfare  state  payments.    
o Transfer  payments  in  the  form  of  benefits  (e.g.  state  pensions  and  the  job-­‐seekers  
allowance)  are  not  included  in  current  government  spending  because  they  are  a  transfer  
from  one  group  (i.e.  people  paying  income  taxes)  to  another  (i.e.  pensioners)  
• X:  Exports  of  goods  and  services  -­‐  Exports  sold  overseas  are  an  inflow  of  demand  (an  injection)  into  
our  circular  flow  of  income  and  spending,  adding  to  aggregate  demand.  
• M:  Imports  of  goods  and  services.  Imports  are  a  withdrawal  of  demand  (a  leakage)  from  the  
circular  flow  of  income  and  spending.    
• Net  exports  measure  the  value  of  exports  minus  the  value  of  imports.  When  net  exports  are  
positive,  there  is  a  trade  surplus  (adding  to  AD);  when  net  exports  are  negative,  there  is  a  trade  
deficit  (reducing  AD).  The  UK  has  been  running  a  large  trade  deficit  for  several  years  now.  
Page  23     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
Components  of  Aggregate  Demand  for  the  UK  Economy    
 
Consumption     Government   Exports     Imports    
Investment  (I)  
  (C)   Spending  (G)   (X)   (M)  
Year   £  Billion   £  Billion   £  Billion   £  Billion   £  Billion  
2008   1016   333   281   485   528  
2009   982   337   240   445   476  
2010   987   337   254   472   518  
2011   985   337   260   499   523  
2012   1000   345   262   502   539  
2013   1018   344   271   510   547  
2014   1044   349   294   512   560  
 
Shocks  to  Aggregate  Demand  
• Many  unexpected  events  cause  changes  in  the  level  of  demand,  output  and  employment  
• These  events  are  called  “shocks”.  Some  of  the  causes  of  AD  shocks  are  as  follows:  
1. A  large  rise  or  fall  in  the  exchange  rate  –  affecting  export  demand  and  second-­‐round  effects  on  
output,  employment,  incomes  and  profits  of  businesses  linked  to  export  industries.  
2. A  recession  in  main  trading  partners  affecting  demand  for  exports  of  goods  and  services.  
3. A  slump  in  the  housing  market  or  a  big  change  in  share  prices  
4. An  event  such  as  the  credit  crunch  (global  financial  crisis)  –  involving  a  fall  in  the  amount  of  credit  
available  for  borrowing  by  households  and  businesses.  
5. An  unexpected  cut  or  an  unexpected  rise  in  interest  rates  or  change  in  government  taxation  and  
spending  –  for  example  deep  cuts  in  government  spending  as  part  of  fiscal  austerity  
These  shocks  will  bring  about  a  shift  in  the  aggregate  demand  curve  
 
The  Aggregate  Demand  Curve  
• The  AD  curve  shows  the  relationship  between  the  general  price  level  and  real  GDP    
The  Relationship  between  Aggregate  Demand  and  the  General  Price  Level  
• There  are  several  explanations  for  an  inverse  relationship  between  AD  and  the  price  level  
1. Falling  real  incomes:  As  the  price  level  rises,  the  real  value  of  people’s  incomes  fall  and  consumers  
are  less  able  to  buy  the  items  they  want  or  need.  If  over  the  course  of  a  year  all  prices  rose  by  10  
per  cent  whilst  your  money  income  remained  the  same,  your  real  income  would  have  fallen  by  10%  
2. The  balance  of  trade:  A  persistent  rise  in  the  price  of  level  of  Country  X  could  make  foreign-­‐
produced  goods  and  services  cheaper  in  price  terms,  causing  a  fall  in  exports  and  a  rise  in  imports.  
This  will  lead  to  a  reduction  in  net  trade  and  a  contraction  in  AD  
3. Interest  rate  effect:  if  the  price  level  rises,  this  causes  inflation  and  an  increase  in  the  demand  for  
money  and  a  possible  rise  in  interest  rates  with  a  deflationary  effect  on  the  economy.  This  assumes  
that  the  central  bank  (in  our  case  the  Bank  of  England)  is  setting  interest  rates  in  order  to  meet  a  
specified  inflation  target.  
 

Page  24     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
 
 
FACTORS  CAUSING  A  SHIFT  IN  AGGREGATE  DEMAND  

Changes  in  Expectations     • When  confidence  falls,  we  see  an  increase  in  saving  and  
Current  spending  is  affected  by   businesses  postpone  investment  projects  because  of  worries  
anticipated  income  and  inflation   over  weak  demand  and  lower  expected  profits.  

Changes  in  Monetary  Policy  –  i.e.   • If  interest  rates  fall  –  this  lowers  the  cost  of  borrowing  and  the  
a  change  in  interest  rates   incentive  to  save,  encouraging  consumption  &  investment  
• There  are  time  lags  between  changes  in  interest  rates  and  AD  

Changes  in  Fiscal  Policy   • The  Government  may  increase  its  expenditure  e.g.  financed  by  
Fiscal  Policy  refers  to  changes  in   a  higher  budget  deficit  -­‐  this  directly  increases  AD  
government  spending,  taxation   • Income  tax  affects  disposable  income  e.g.  lower  income  tax  
and  borrowing   raises  disposable  income  and  should  boost  consumption.    

Economic  events  in  the  world   • A  depreciation  in  a  currency  makes  imports  dearer  and  exports  
economy   cheaper  -­‐  the  result  should  be  that  AD  grows  
International  factors  such  as  the   • An  increase  in  overseas  incomes  raises  demand  for  exports.  In  
exchange  rate  and  foreign  income   contrast  a  recession  in  a  major  export  market  will  lead  to  a  fall  
in  exports  and  an  inward  shift  of  aggregate  demand.  

Changes  in  household  wealth   • Changing  share  and  property  prices  affect  the  level  of  wealth  
• Declining  asset  prices  can  hit  confidence  /  a  fall  in  expectations  

Changes  in  the  supply  of  credit   • The  availability  of  credit  from  the  banking  system  is  vital  for  
the  smooth  functioning  of  most  modern  economies  

Page  25     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
 
 
Examples  of  Causes  of  Shifts  in  Aggregate  Demand  
 

Fall  in  AD   Increase  in  AD  

Fall  in  exports   Depreciaton  of  the  exchange  rate  

Cut  in  government  spending   Cuts  in  direct  and  indirect  taxes  

Higher  interest  rates   Increase  in  house  prices  

Expansion  of  supply  of  credit  +  lower  


Decline  in  household  wealth   interest  rates  

 
   

Page  26     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
8. Consumer  Spending  
Introduction  
• Consumption  is  spending  by  households  on  goods  &  services  
• Consumption  is  the  biggest  single  component  of  aggregate  demand  
• The  main  sources  of  consumer  incomes  are  wages,  savings,  investments,  pensions  and  benefits.  
• In  2012  consumer  spending  in  the  UK  was  £927  billion  out  of  a  total  GDP  level  of  £1504  billion  
• Consumption  is  the  biggest  component  of  UK  aggregate  demand;  in  2012  it  was  61%  of  GDP  
Some  Key  Terms  
 
Base  interest  rate   Set  by  the  Bank  of  England,  it  is  the  rate  of  interest  used  by  commercial  banks  
as  the  basis  for  their  lending  rates.  Base  rates  are  set  by  the  Monetary  Policy  
Committee  

Consumer  price  index   A  measure  of  the  price  level  based  on  the  prices  of  a  collection  of  goods  and  
(CPI)   services  that  are  designed  to  reflect  the  consumption  basket  of  the  average  
consumer  /  household  
Disposable  income   Household  income  after  the  deduction  of  taxes  and  the  addition  of  welfare  
benefits.  
FTSE-­‐100  Index   The  FTSE-­‐100  tracks  the  share-­‐prices  of  the  100  largest  companies  listed  on  the  
London  Stock  Exchange,  based  on  their  market  capitalisation  
Savings  ratio   The  ratio  of  personal  saving  to  household  disposable  income    
Unemployment   The  official  definition  includes  someone  who  is  either  out  of  work  and  actively  
looking  for  a  job  or  out  of  work  and  waiting  to  start  a  job  in  the  next  two  weeks.  
Value  added  tax  (VAT)   A  tax  on  consumption,  which  is  paid  to  the  tax  authorities  by  the  seller  on  
behalf  of  the  consumer.  The  standard  rate  of  VAT  in  the  UK  is  20%  
 
Disposable  income  and  spending  –  the  propensity  to  spend  
• John  Maynard  Keynes  was  a  major  figure  in  the  history  of  economics  
developed  a  theory  of  consumption  that  depended  mainly  on  disposable  
income.    
• Disposable  income  is  household  income  after  the  deduction  of  taxes  and  
the  addition  of  welfare  benefits  such  as  the  state  pension  and  family  credit  
The  Marginal  Propensity  to  Consume  and  the  Propensity  of  Save  
• What  matters  is  the  rate  at  which  consumers  increase  their  spending  as  
income  rises.  This  is  called  the  marginal  propensity  to  consume.    
• Say  that  someone  receives  extra  pay  of  £2000  in  a  year  and  they  spend  
£1500,  thus  the  marginal  propensity  to  consume  is  £1500  /  £2000  =  0.75.    
• The  remainder  is  saved  so  the  marginal  propensity  to  save  is  0.25.    
• A  simple  rule  to  remember  is  that  the  marginal  propensity  to  consumer  added  to  the  marginal  
propensity  to  save  must  always  equal  1.  
Generally,  people  on  lower  incomes  tend  to  have  a  higher  propensity  to  spend.  This  matters  when  the  
government  announces  changes  in  taxation  and  the  level  of  welfare  benefits  because  if  incone  is  
redistributed  to  lower  income  families,  there  might  be  an  overall  increase  in  consumer  demand.    A  fall  in  
the  marginal  propensity  to  spend  will  cause  a  lower  level  of  consumption  for  a  given  level  of  income.  

Page  27     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
 
Some  Factors  that  Determine  Consumer  Spending  
Many  factors  have  an  influence  on  the  total  level  of  consumer  spending  in  an  economy.    
• Real  incomes  –  if  people’s  money  wages  rise  faster  than  prices,  then  real  incomes  will  increase  and  
this  leads  to  a  higher  level  of  real  purchasing  power  
• Direct  and  indirect  taxation  –  if  there  is  a  cut  in  direct  taxation  then,  other  factors  remaining  the  
same,  consumers  will  experience  an  increase  in  their  disposable  income  and  spending  power.  In  
contrast,  a  hike  in  indirect  taxes  such  as  import  duties  or  VAT  will  cause  prices  to  rise  and  real  
incomes  to  decline.  
• Interest  Rates  –  lower  interest  rates  cuts  the  cost  of  paying  the  debt  on  a  mortgage  and  increases  
the  effective  disposable  income  of  homeowners.  Official  interest  rates  in  the  UK  have  been  at  0.5%  
since  March  2009.  
• Household  Wealth  –  for  example  a  sustained  drop  in  house  prices  might  cause  a  decline  in  
personal  wealth  and  spending  as  homeowners  have  less  housing  equity  available  to  borrow.  This  is  
sometimes  referred  to  as  the  negative  wealth  effect.  Housing  equity  is  the  difference  between  the  
market  value  of  property  and  the  outstanding  mortgage  loan.  
• Consumer  Confidence  –  for  example,  fears  of  rising  unemployment  and  expectations  of  higher  
taxes  will  hit  consumer  sentiment  and  spending.  If  you  don’t  have  enough  confidence,  you  are  
unlikely  to  go  ahead  with  major  purchases  such  as  a  new  car  or  home  improvements  
• The  Supply  of  Credit:  In  recent  years  banks  have  appeared  to  become  less  willing  to  lend  and  if  
they  do,  the  rate  of  interest  on  the  loan  has  increased.  The  supply  of  mortgage  finance  has  dried  up  
and  would-­‐be  homebuyers  now  need  to  find  a  bigger  deposit  before  getting  a  home  loan.    
• The  Distribution  of  Income:  Lower  income  families  tend  to  have  a  higher  propensity  to  consume  
than  better-­‐off  households  (who  tend  to  have  a  higher  savings  ratio).  Thus  a  redistribution  of  
income  towards  poorer  families  may  have  the  effect  of  boosting  total  consumer  demand.  
• Demographics:  The  size  and  growth  rate  of  a  country’s  population  and  the  age  structure  has  a  
direct  effect  on  total  consumer  spending.  Some  countries  have  a  strongly  positive  natural  rate  of  
population  growth  perhaps  aided  by  net  migration  of  labour.  An  expanding  population  will  add  to  
demand  for  many  different  goods  and  services  including  housing,  health  care  and  education.  

Consumer  Confidence  
• Consumer  confidence  is  measured  using  surveys  that  ask  people  about  their  own  financial  situation  
• When  consumer  confidence  is  low,  people  save  more  because  of  low  job  security  
• The  Global  Financial  Crisis  brought  about  a  big  shock  to  consumer  and  business  confidence  in  many  
countries  across  the  world  
• Expectations  are  really  important  –  Keynes  wrote  about  the  uncertain  “animal  spirits”  of  agents  in  
the  economy  that  affect  their  planned  spending,  saving  and  investment.  
• Consumer  confidence  is  affected  by  many  factors  including  the  following  

Page  28     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Economic  growth   Household  debt  

Unemployment   House  prices    

 
Mortgage  Interest  Rates  and  Consumer  Spending  
 
Average  interest  rates  for  mortgages  in  the  United  Kingdom  (UK)  as  of  March  2014,  by  type  of  mortgage  
 
5.0%  
4.43%  
4.5%  

4.0%  
3.47%  
3.5%  
Average  interest  rate  

2.97%  
3.0%   2.83%  
2.37%  
2.5%  

2.0%  

1.5%  

1.0%  

0.5%  

0.0%  
2  year  fixed  rate   3  year  fixed   5  year  fixed   Tracker  mortgages   SVR  mortgages**  
mortgages   mortgage   mortgage  
 
 
(SVR  stands  for  standard  variable  rate  mortgage)  
• If  mortgage  interest  rates  fall  then  the  effective  disposable  income  of  families  with  a  mortgage  will  
rise  giving  them  more  purchasing  power  to  buy  other  goods  and  services  
• A  sizeable  majority  of  home-­‐owners  have  fixed  rate  mortgages  in  which  case  changes  in  mortgage  
interest  rates  will  not  affect  them  immediately  

Page  29     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
• Since  2009,  mortgage  interest  rates  have  been  lower,  giving  a  significant  increase  to  the  spending  
power  of  existing  people  in  the  housing  market  and  this  has  helped  to  bolster  consumer  confidence  
The  Wealth  Effect  
• Wealth  represents  the  value  of  a  stock  of  assets  
• For  most  people  the  majority  of  their  wealth  is  held  in  property,  shares  in  quoted  companies  on  
the  stock  market,  savings  in  banks  and  money  building  up  in  occupational  pension  schemes  
• Many  economists  think  that  there  is  a  positive  relationship  between  wealth  and  spending  although  
the  size  of  the  effect  is  open  to  question.    

• For  millions  of  people,  assets  in  the  form  of  savings  and  occupational  pension  schemes  are  
important.  So  the  real  value  of  their  savings  and  the  income  that  flows  from  deposit  accounts  from  
interest  payments  will  have  a  direct  effect  on  their  spending  power.  
• In  recent  years  the  average  rate  of  interest  on  UK  savings  deposits  have  less  than  the  rate  of  
inflation  –  causing  a  cut  in  the  real  purchasing  power  of  savers  
House  Prices  
• There  was  a  surge  in  house  prices  between  2004  and  2007.  This  was  a  direct  result  of  the  credit  
boom  and,  as  a  result,  property  prices  climbed  to  unsustainable  levels.    
• Recession  helped  bring  prices  down  but  in  2013  they  started  to  rise  once  more  at  a  fast  rate  and  
they  continued  to  rise  in  2014  and  2015.  Will  this  help  the  UK  economy  or  be  a  problem  going  
forward?  
• The  next  chart  shows  average  house  prices  in  the  UK  using  data  from  the  Halifax  House  Price  Index  
 
280000  
Average  mix-­‐adjusted  house  price  in  £s  

275000  

270000  

265000  

260000  

255000  

250000  
Jan   Feb   Mar   Apr   May   Jun   Jul   Aug   Sep   Oct   Nov   Dec   Jan   Feb   Mar   Apr   May  
'14   '14   '14   '14   '14   '14   '14   '14   '14   '14   '14   '14   '15   '15   '15   '15   '15  
January  2014  to  May  2015  
 
   
   

Page  30     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Share  prices  and  consumer  spending  
 
Yearly  highs  and  lows  of  the  FTSE  100  Index  (London  Stock  Exchange)  between  1995  and  2014  
 

Highs   Lows  

8000  

7000  
Changes  of  the  FTSE  100  Index  in  points  

6000  

5000  

4000  

3000  

2000  

1000  

0  
1995  1996  1997  1998  1999  2000  2001  2002  2003  2004  2005  2006  2007  2008  2009  2010  2011  2012  2013  2014  
 
• The  FTSE-­‐100,  tracks  share-­‐price  movements  in  the  100  largest  companies  by  market  capitalization  
listed  on  the  London  Stock  Exchange.    
• A  rise  in  the  FTSE-­‐100  might  help  to  increase  consumer  spending  if  it  causes  a  rise  in  confidence.    
• Consumer  spending  power  might  also  be  boosted  from  a  rise  in  share  dividend  payments  from  
listed  companies,  dividend  income  adds  directly  to  disposable  incomes  for  shareholders.  
Consumer  borrowing  
• Most  of  us  at  some  time  in  our  lives  need  to  borrow  money  to  finance  spending.  The  credit  market  
for  individuals  is  complex.  Broadly  speaking  we  can  distinguish  between:  
1. Unsecured  borrowing  –  that  is  a  loan  or  an  overdraft  not  tied  to  the  value  of  another  asset.  
Examples  of  this  are  student  overdrafts,  bank  loans  and  money  borrowed  on  store  and  credit  cards  
2. Secured  borrowing  –  is  lending  where  the  borrower  must  use  another  asset  as  collateral  for  the  
loan.  The  best  example  is  a  mortgage  with  a  bank  or  building  society.  Homebuyers  are  at  risk  if  they  
fail  to  keep  up  with  mortgage  repayments  and  ultimately,  the  lender  may  seek  repossession  of  the  
property.  
   

Page  31     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Annual  growth  rates  of  consumer  credit  in  high  street  banks  in  the  United  Kingdom  (UK)  from  2010  to  2015  
 
4.6%  
5.0%  

4.0%  

3.0%  
2.1%  
2.0%  
Growth  rate  

1.0%  

0.0%   -­‐0.5%  
-­‐1.1%  
-­‐1.0%  
-­‐1.9%  
-­‐2.0%   -­‐2.8%  
-­‐3.0%  

-­‐4.0%  
June  2010   Jun  11   Jun  12   Jun  13   Jun  14   Jun  15  
 
 
In  Britain,  the  majority  of  the  outstanding  debt  owed  by  households  is  secured  debt  in  the  property  market  
and  this  reflects  the  significance  of  the  housing  market  in  influencing  consumer  spending  and  financial  
stability.  
 
Affordability  of  buying  or  moving  house  according  to  the  United  Kingdom  (UK)  adults  as  of  2015,  by  issue  
 

Very  serious  problem   Somewhat  serious  problem  

60.0%  
54%  
48%  
50.0%  
40%   40%  
Share  of  respondents  

40.0%   35%   36%  


32%  
30%  
30.0%  

20.0%  

10.0%  

0.0%  
Ge•ng  onto  property   Saving  for  a  deposit  to   House  prices   Ability  to  get  a  mortgage  
ladder  (first-­‐tme  buyers)   buy   or  remortgage  

     

Page  32     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
9. Household  Saving  
Savings  in  the  Economy  
• Saving  is  household  disposable  income  that  is  not  spent  i.e.  it  is  deferred  spending  
• Disposable  income  =  income  after  taxes  and  benefits  
• The  savings  ratio  is  the  %  of  disposable  income  saved  rather  than  spent  e.g.  if  a  person  has  an  
annual  income  of  £25,000  and  saves  £2500  of  this,  then  the  savings  ratio  is  10%  
• A  high  savings  ratio  lowers  consumption  and  aggregate  demand  for  goods  and  services  
Motivations  for  saving  
There  are  many  different  motivations.  Some  are  short  term  e.g.  for  a  holiday,  others  are  long-­‐term  e.g.  
funding  college  fees.  The  chart  below  tracks  motivations  for  saving  from  a  survey  of  US  households.  
   

Share  of  respondents  


0.0%   10.0%   20.0%   30.0%   40.0%   50.0%   60.0%   70.0%  

Rainy  day  fund/unexpected  expenses   65%  

Retrement   52%  

Vacaton   31%  

College   20%  

Car  purchase   15%  

Home  purchase   11%  

Marriage   4%  

Birth  of  a  child   4%  

Other   14%  

 
 
What  factors  affect  how  much  of  their  income  people  save?  
 
=  Nominal  interest  rate  adjusted  for  inflation,  a  positive  real  interest  
Real  Interest  Rate  
rate  incentivises  saving  
If  consumers  expect  prices  to  fall  (i.e.  deflation)  they  may  choose  to  
Price  Expectations  
save  more  now  
Consumer  borrowing  counts  of  dis-­‐saving  (spending  >  current  
Availability  of  Credit  
income)  
Unemployment  /  Job  Security   When  unemployment  is  rising,  people  save  more  as  a  precaution  
Consumer  Confidence  /  Expectations   When  consumer  confidence  is  strong,  people  are  more  willing  to  
/  Uncertainty   borrow  and  save  less  
Interest  on  many  types  of  saving  is  taxed,  some  savings  schemes  
Taxation  of  Savings  
are  tax-­‐free  or  low-­‐tax    
Deposit  guarantees  can  encourage  a  higher  level  of  household  
Trust  in  Savings  Institutions  
saving  in  banks  
Short-­‐term  saving  to  repay  credit  card  bills  or  save  for  a  mortgage  
Need  to  pay  back  debt  
deposit  
   

Page  33     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Data  for  UK  Households  on  Level  of  Savings  Balances  
 
60.0%  
55%  

50.0%  
Share  of  respondents  

40.0%  

30.0%  

19%  
20.0%  
15%  
12%  
10.0%  

0.0%  
No  savings   Have  between  1  and   Have  over  50,000  GBP  in   Don't  know  
50,000  GBP  in  savings   savings  
 
 
• Around  one  fifth  of  households  in  the  UK  have  no  savings  at  all  –  indeed  many  are  dependent  on  
short  term  credit  from  month  to  month.    
• The  majority  of  households  with  savings  have  less  than  £10,000  saved.  One  third  have  less  than  
£500.  One  family  in  20  has  more  than  £100,000  
 Savings  for  All  UK  Families  with  Savings  
 
80.0%   75%  

70.0%  

60.0%   56%  
Share  of  respondents  

48%  
50.0%  
41%  
40.0%   35%  
31%  
30.0%  

20.0%  

10.0%   5%  

0.0%  
Less  than   Less  than   Less  than   Less  than   Less  than   Less  than   More  than  
£500  saved   £1000  saved   £2000  saved   £5000  saved   £10000  saved  £50000  saved   £100,000  
saved  
 
 
 
Evaluating  the  importance  of  saving  for  an  economy  

Page  34     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Decisions  by  people  and  by  businesses  about  how  much  to  save  have  a  powerful  effect  on  economic  
performance  –  here  are  some  reasons:  
1. Corporate  savings  provide  a  cushion  during  a  recession  when  demand  and  profits  fall.  Business  
savings  can  be  used  as  finance  for  takeovers  and  for  capital  investment  projects  
a. Savings  by  families  flow  into  financial  institutions  
b. Banks  need  deposits  as  capital  from  which  they  can  lend.  Many  small  businesses  have  
complained  about  the  difficulty  in  getting  loans  in  the  aftermath  of  the  global  financial  
crisis  
c. Savings  flow  into  pension  funds  –  these  can  be  reinvested  in  stock  markets  providing  funds  
for  businesses  that  need  to  raise  capital  to  finance  expansion  plans.  
2. Savings  provide  a  source  of  household  wealth  and  a  buffer  against  uncertain  times  allowing  people  
to  smooth  out  their  consumption  when  times  are  tough.  They  allow  people  to  reduce  debts  and  
save  to  allow  a  reasonable  standard  of  living  during  retirement.  
The  Paradox  of  Thrift  
• The  paradox  of  thrift  is  an  idea  from  Keynesian  economics.  Saving  is  regarded  as  positive  because  it  
provides  the  funds  to  finance  the  capital  investment  needed  to  promote  long-­‐term  growth    
• But  if  many  people  start  saving  more  at  the  same  time,  this  causes  a  drop  in  consumer  demand  and  
an  even  deeper  recession      
• What  might  be  rational  for  an  individual  might  be  damaging  for  the  economy  as  a  whole  
 
The  UK  Household  Savings  Ratio  
• The  chart  below  shows  the  published  measure  for  the  savings  ratio  
• The  savings  ratio  is  the  percentage  of  household  disposable  income  that  is  saved  rather  then  spent  
• The  savings  ratio  climbed  during  the  recession  but  has  been  falling  since  then  back  towards  6%  
Household  Savings  Ratio  (Per  Cent  of  Disposable  Income)  
 
14

12

10

0
1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013

Page  35     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
10.Capital  Investment  
Introduction  to  Investment  
• Investment  is  spending  on  capital  goods  such  as  new  factories  &  other  buildings  machinery  &  
vehicles  
• Much  investment  include  and  takes  advantages  of  advances  in  technology  
• Investment  is  a  component  of  AD,  and  is  a  factor  affecting  competitiveness  in  a  globalising  world  
• In  market  economies,  most  investment  is  done  by  private  sector  businesses  but  a  substantial  
amount  comes  from  the  government  (in  the  state  sector)  
• A  broader  definition  of  investment  includes  spending  on  improving  the  human  capital  of  the  
workforce  through  training  and  education  to  improve  the  skills  and  competences  of  workers  
• Infrastructure  is  spending  on  new  sewers,  roads,  wind  farms,  telecommunications  networks  and  
ports  done  by  both  the  private  and  the  public  sector.  
Gross  and  Net  Investment  
1. Gross  investment  spending  is  the  total  amount  that  the  economy  spends  on  new  capital.  But  this  
figure  includes  an  estimate  for  the  value  of  capital  depreciation  since  some  investment  is  needed  
each  year  just  to  replace  technologically  obsolete  or  worn-­‐out  plant  and  machinery.    
2. If  gross  investment  is  higher  than  depreciation,  then  net  investment  will  be  positive  and  this  means  
that  businesses  will  have  a  higher  productive  capacity  and  can  meet  rising  demand  in  the  future  
3. Gross  investment  –  capital  depreciation  =  net  investment  

Gross   Net  
Investment   Investment  
Gross  investment  spending  is  
total  investment  on  new   =  Gross  investment  adjusted  
for  capital  consumpton  
capital  inputs  

It  is  the  total  amount  that   Some  new  investment  


the  economy  spends  on  new   needed  each  year  to  replace  
capital     worn  out  machinery  

 
 
Investment  and  Aggregate  Demand  
• Investment  is  a  component  of  AD  i.e.  (C+I+G+X-­‐M).  Businesses  involved  in  developing,  
manufacturing,  testing,  distributing  and  marketing  the  capital  goods  themselves  stand  to  benefit  
from  increased  orders  for  new  plant  and  machinery.      

• A  rise  in  capital  spending  will  have  a  positive  multiplier  effect  Increased  spending  on  capital  goods  
boosts  demand  for  industries  that  manufacture  the  technology  /  hardware  /  construction  sector  
 
 
Page  36     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
Investment  and  Jobs  
• Some  investment  projects  cost  jobs  when  a  business  replaces  labour  with  capital  inputs.    
• Investment  also  creates  jobs  in  producing,  designing  and  installing  plant  and  equipment  
Importance  of  the  Quality  of  Capital  Investment  
 
• A  high  level  of  investment  on  its  own  may  not  be  sufficient  to  create  an  increase  in  LRAS  as  workers  
need  training  to  work  the  new  machinery  and  there  will  be  time  lags  between  new  capital  spending  
and  the  effects  on  output  and  productivity.    
• If  there  is  insufficient  demand,  a  growing  capital  stock  may  lead  to  excess  capacity  putting  
downward  pressure  on  prices  and  profits  
 
Implications  of  a  Rise  in  Business  Investment  
Higher  investment  can  raise  actual  and  potential  GDP  and  also  help  to  control  inflationary  pressures.  
 
Macroeconomic  advantages  of  a  higher  level  of  capital  
Evaluation  point  
investment  

Investment  is  an  injection  into  the  circular  flow  of   Some  of  the  investment  (capital)  goods  might  
income  –  it  is  a  component  of  AD   be  imported  –  a  leakage  from  the  circular  flow  

New  capital  can  boost  productivity  and  creates   Might  be  a  lengthy  time  lag  between  workers  
additional  capacity  to  supply   getting  more  capital  and  productivity  rising  

Creates  extra  demand  in  investment  goods  industries   Some  capital  investment  replaces  labour  and  
and  can  lead  to  multiplier  effects  on  the  level  of  GDP   therefore  might  cause  unemployment  

Investment  will  boost  a  country’s  competitiveness  and   Many  other  factors  affect  competitiveness  –  
therefore  improve  the  trade  balance   including  the  level  of  the  exchange  rate  

 
The  Accelerator  Effect  (The  Link  between  Consumption  and  Investment)  
• The  accelerator  effect  is  a  relationship  between  planned  capital  investment  and  the  rate  of  change  
of  national  income  (GDP)  
• Consider  an  industry  where  demand  is  rising  quickly  
• Firms  may  respond  initially  by  using  their  existing  productive  capacity  more  intensively  or  running  
down  stocks  of  finished  products  
• If  they  expect  high  demand  will  be  sustained  –  they  may  increase  spending  on  plant  and  machinery,  
factories  and  new  technology  in  order  to  increase  their  supply  capacity  
• This  causes  an  accelerator  effect  –  where  a  given  change  in  demand  for  consumer  goods  and  
services  will  cause  a  bigger  percentage  change  in  demand  for  capital  goods  
The  Negative  Accelerator  Effect  
• When  the  rate  of  growth  of  demand  in  an  industry  slows  then  net  investment  spending  by  
businesses  often  falls.  E.g.  declining  investment  in  steel  plants  in  a  recession  or  a  drop  in  
investment  demand  when  government  subsidies  for  renewable  energy  are  cut    
 

Page  37     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Examples  of  the  Accelerator  Effect  in  Action  
   

Investment  to  create  extra  capacity  in   Investment  in  4G  mobile  networks  to  
cloud  computng  storage  services   meet  rising  household  and  business  
demand  

Expanding  the  fleet  sizes  of  growing   Capital  investment  in  renewable  
airlines  especially  for  low-­‐cost  short   energy  as  the  balance  of  energy  
destnatons   supply  shizs  towards  renewables  

 
Economic  Importance  of  Infrastructure  Investment  
Infrastructure  spending  includes  projects  for  new  sewers,  roads,  wind  farms,  telecommunications  networks  
and  ports  by  both  the  private  and  the  public  sector.  The  UK  has  a  national  infrastructure  plan  designed  at  
fast-­‐forwarding  major  projects  including  transport  investment  and  capital  spending  in  the  energy  sector.  
 
Examples  of  UK  infrastructure  projects  
•   2nd  Forth  Road  Bridge  
•   Cross  Rail  and  the  High  Speed  Rail  project  
•   London  Gateway  Port  &  new  London  super  sewer    
•   Nuclear  power  plants  including  Hinkley  Point  

Economic  significance  of  infrastructure  


•   Potentally  high  mulkplier  effects  from  mult-­‐billion  investment  projects  –  boosts  
AD  and  jobs  
•   Lack  of  infrastructure  may  discourage  FDI  
•   Increases  the  capital  stock  /  produckve  potenkal  

 
 
Page  38     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
11.Understanding  Aggregate  Supply  
 
What  do  we  mean  by  aggregate  supply?  
• Aggregate  supply  (AS)  measures  the  volume  of  goods  and  services  produced  each  year.  AS  
represents  the  ability  of  an  economy  to  deliver  goods  and  services  to  meet  demand  
• Short  run  aggregate  supply  (SRAS)  shows  total  planned  output  when  prices  can  change  but  the  
prices  and  productivity  of  factor  inputs  e.g.  wage  rates  and  the  state  of  technology  are  held  
constant.  
• Long  run  aggregate  supply  (LRAS):    LRAS  shows  total  planned  output  when  both  prices  and  average  
wage  rates  can  change  –  it  is  a  measure  of  a  country’s  potential  output  and  the  concept  is  linked  to  
the  production  possibility  frontier  
• In  the  long  run,  the  LRAS  curve  is  assumed  to  be  vertical  (i.e.  it  does  not  change  when  the  general  
price  level  changes)  
• In  the  short  run,  the  SRAS  curve  is  assumed  to  be  upward  sloping  (i.e.  it  is  responsive  to  a  change  in  
aggregate  demand  reflected  in  a  change  in  the  general  price  level)  
Short  Run  Aggregate  Supply  Curve  
A  change  in  the  price  level  brought  about  by  a  shift  in  AD  results  in  a  movement  along  the  short  run  AS  
curve.  If  AD  rises,  we  see  an  expansion  of  SRAS;  if  AD  falls  we  see  a  contraction  of  SRAS.  
 

 
Shifts  in  Short  Run  Aggregate  Supply  (SRAS)  
 
Shifts  in  the  position  of  the  short  run  aggregate  supply  curve  in  the  price  level  /  output  space  are  caused  by  
changes  in  the  conditions  of  supply  for  different  sectors  of  the  economy:  
 
The  main  cause  of  a  shift  in  the  aggregate  supply  curve  is  a  change  in  business  costs  –  for  example:  
1. Changes  in  unit  labour  costs:  Unit  labour  costs  are  wage  costs  adjusted  for  productivity.  A  rise  in  
unit  labour  costs  might  due  to  higher  wages  or  a  fall  in  the  level  labour  of  productivity  
2. Changes  in  other  production  costs:  For  example  rental  costs  for  retailers,  the  price  of  building  
materials  for  the  construction  industry,  a  change  in  the  price  of  hops  used  in  beer  making  or  the  
cost  of  fertilisers  used  in  farming.  

Page  39     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
3. Commodity  prices  Changes  to  raw  material  costs  and  other  components  e.g.  the  prices  of  oil,  
natural  gas,  electricity  copper,  rubber,  iron  ore,  aluminium  and  other  inputs  will  affect  a  firm’s  costs  
4. Exchange  rates:  Costs  might  be  affected  by  a  change  in  the  exchange  rate  which  causes  fluctuations  
in  the  prices  of  imported  products.  A  fall  (depreciation)  in  the  exchange  rate  increases  the  costs  of  
importing  raw  materials  and  component  supplies  from  overseas  
5. Government  taxation  and  subsidies:  
a. An  increase  in  taxes  to  meet  environmental  objectives  (known  as  green  taxes)  will  cause  
higher  costs  and  an  inward  shift  in  the  SRAS  curve  –  for  example  a  higher  price  for  carbon  
emissions    
b. Lower  duty  on  petrol  and  diesel  would  lower  costs  and  cause  an  outward  shift  in  SRAS  
6. The  price  of  imports:    
a. Cheaper  imports  from  a  lower-­‐cost  country  has  the  effect  of  shifting  out  SRAS  
b. A  reduction  in  an  import  tariff  on  imports  or  an  increase  in  the  size  of  an  import  quota  will  
also  boost  the  supply  available  at  each  price  level  causing  an  outward  shift  of  SRAS  
7. Short  run  shocks  to  production:  Temporary  non-­‐economic  factors  affect  SRAS  in  different  
countries,  for  example  a  hurricane,  a  tsunami  or  the  effects  of  drought,  flooding  or  political  crisis.  
 
Key  revision  point:    
The  main  driver  of  SRAS  for  the  economy  is  the  level  of  production  costs  some  of  which  are  influenced  by  
government  policy,  others  by  world  prices.  Remember  that  the  exchange  rate  is  important  for  the  UK  
because  a  large  percentage  of  our  components  /  raw  materials  /  energy  are  imported.  
 

Page  40     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
 
 
External  Factors  affecting  Aggregate  Supply  (AS)  
 

World  oil  and  gas  prices  

• The  UK  is  a  net  importer  of  oil  –  an  input  used  in  many  different  industries  

Energy  prices  /  costs  

• The  UK  is  also  a  net  importer  of  energy  source  such  as  coal  

Other  mineral  /  metal  prices  

• E.g.  Rubber,  iron  ore,  rare  earths  (used  in  many  electronic  products)    

Foodstuff  prices  

• E.g.  Internatonal  prices  for  fresh  foods,  coffee,  wheat,  cocoa,  sugar  

Import  tariffs  /  quotas  

• The  UK  is  a  member  of  the  European  Union  which  sets  a  common  import  tariff  on  different  goods  
and  services  coming  into  the  EU  Single  Market  
 
 
 
 
   

Page  41     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Changes  in  global  oil  prices  affect  aggregate  supply  
 
Year  on  Year  change  in  
US  Dollar  Oil  Price   UK  Oil  Price  
  oil  prices  
Year   US  $  per  barrel   £  per  barrel   Per  cent  
2007   73   36.2   0.9  
2008   98   52.1   43.9  
2009   63   39.7   -­‐23.9  
2010   80   52.0   31.0  
2011   111   69.2   33.0  
2012   112   70.5   1.9  
2013   109   69.5   -­‐1.3  
2014   99   60.1   -­‐13.5  
2015  (May)   65   42.7   -­‐34.3  
 
Evaluating  Economic  Effects  of  Falling  Oil  Prices  
 
Changes  in  world  oil  prices  have  effects  on  the  demand  and  supply-­‐side  of  an  economy.  The  UK  is  a  net  
importer  of  oil  but  is  also  an  oil  producer  and  exporter.  On  balance,  lower  oil  prices  are  good  for  economic  
growth  in  the  UK  because  lower  prices  for  consumers  and  businesses  effectively  act  like  a  tax  cut.  
 

Cheaper  fuel  for  motorists  and  


businesses  if  lower  costs  are   Decline  in  value  of  oil  exports  +   Possible  fall  in  exploraton  &  
cheaper  imports   extracton  in  the  North  Sea  
passed  on  in  retail  prices  

Falling  energy  costs  bring  down   As  oil  exporter,  the  UK  


Renewable  energy  may  be  less   inflaton  -­‐  possible  risk  of   exchange  rate  may  fall  helping  
economically  viable  
deflaton   other  export  industries  
 
 
 
 
   

Page  42     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Long  Run  Aggregate  Supply  (LRAS)  
 
In  the  long  run,  the  ability  of  an  economy  to  produce  goods  and  services  to  meet  demand  is  based  on  the  
state  of  production  technology  and  the  availability  and  quality  of  factor  inputs.    
   

 
Trend  Growth  
Trend  growth  is  the  estimated  rate  of  growth  of  a  nation’s  productive  potential.  The  table  shows  data  for  
the  UK  and  finds  that  productivity  growth  is  the  main  driver  of  potential  output  over  the  long  run.  The  main  
measure  of  productivity  used  is  output  per  person-­‐hour.  
 
Components  of  Trend  Growth  for  the  UK  Economy  
 
    Annual  growth  rate  (per  cent)  

Overall  
Potential   Potential   Potential  
Potential   Potential  
    productivity   employment  rate   population  
average  hours   Output  for  the  
(output  per  hour)   for  those  aged  16+   growth  
UK  Economy  

2015   1.4   0.0   0.0   0.6   2.1  


2016   1.8   -­‐0.1   -­‐0.1   0.6   2.2  
2017   2.0   -­‐0.2   -­‐0.1   0.6   2.3  
2018   2.1   -­‐0.2   -­‐0.1   0.5   2.3  
Data  for  2015  and  2016  are  forecasts  published  at  time  of  July  2015  budget  
 
   

Page  43     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Key  Factors  affecting  Long-­‐Run  Aggregate  Supply  
 

Gains  from  Innovakon  


Higher  Produckvity  of   Increased  Labour  Market   and  Enterprise   Capital  Investment    
Labour  and  Capital     Parkcipakon    
These  are  two  key  factors   Including  capital  spending  
I.e.  a  rise  in  output  per   i.e.  A  growing  labour   by  businesses,  inward  
that  determine  
person  employed  or   supply  and  a  rise  in  the   investment  from  overseas  
compettveness  
increased  efficiency  of   number  of  people  in  paid   (FDI)  and  the  Public  
especially  in  internatonal  
technology   work     Sector  (Government)  
markets  

 
 
 
Productivity  
Productivity  measures  the  efficiency  of  the  production  process  
• In  the  long  run,  productivity  is  a  major  determinant  of  economic  growth  and  of  inflation.  
• A  fall  in  labour  productivity  leads  to  a  rise  in  firms’  (unit)  costs  of  production  (assuming  that  the  
level  of  wages  remains  the  same)  
• Higher  productivity  allows  businesses  to  pay  higher  wages  and  achieve  increased  profits  at  the  
same  time.  
The  UK  Productivity  Gap  
The  table  below  measures  an  index  of  constant  price  GDP  per  hour  worked  for  a  range  of  countries  –  
evidence  of  the  productivity  gap  where  productivity  in  the  UK  lags  behind  many  other  major  countries.  
 
France   Germany   Italy   Japan   UK   USA  
 
2007   100.0   100.0   100.0   100.0   100.0   100.0  
2008   99.3   99.6   98.9   100.0   99.5   100.5  
2009   98.7   96.9   96.7   99.1   97.8   102.9  
2010   100.2   98.5   99.0   102.8   99.3   105.5  
2011   101.4   99.5   99.1   102.8   101.7   106.0  
2012   102.1   99.9   98.3   103.9   99.7   106.3  
2013   102.4   99.4   98.5   105.5   99.4   107.6  
 
 
 
   
Page  44     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
Why  does  the  UK  economy  lag  on  productivity?  
 

Low  rate  of  new  capital   Banking  crisis  affectng   Possible  slowing  rates  of  
investment  in  the  UK   lending  to  businesses   innovaton  

Persistent  skills   Relatvely  low  levels  of   Low  aggregate  demand  


shortages  in  key   market  competton   &  high  spare  capacity  
industries  
 
 
Impact  of  improved  productivity  on  key  macroeconomic  indicators  
All  other  things  being  equal,  an  improvement  in  labour  productivity  is  most  likely  to:  
 
Macroeconomic  Objective   Comment  on  the  Effect  

Inflation   Lower  –  unit  costs  will  be  falling  


Economic  growth   Higher  –  gains  in  aggregate  supply  
Unemployment   Lower  in  long  run  as  growth  rises  
Balance  of  trade  in  goods  &  services   Improved  –  more  competitive  exports  
Spare  capacity  in  the  economy   Rise  from  extra  capacity  in  short  run  
Business  investment   Higher  –  profits  will  have  increased  
Productivity  gains  in  government  will  help  to  reduce  
Government  fiscal  balance  
state  spending  
 
Explaining  the  non-­‐linear  AS  curve  
• When  spare  capacity  is  high  then  SRAS  will  be  elastic  
• A  rise  in  AD  can  be  met  easily  by  increased  output  
• There  is  little  threat  of  rising  prices  (inflation)  
• The  elasticity  of  SRAS  curve  falls  as  output  increases  
• The  amount  of  spare  capacity  declines  
o Possibility  of  diminishing  returns  in  production  
o Bottlenecks  in  supply  of  inputs  and  components  
o Resource  shortages  as  the  economy  approaches  full  employment  e.g.  Skilled  labour  
becomes  more  scarce  

Page  45     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
• When  SRAS  becomes  perfectly  inelastic  the  economy  is  at  full  capacity  (this  is  equivalent  to  being  
on  the  PPF  boundary)  
• Further  increases  in  AD  at  this  point  are  inflationary  in  the  short  run  with  little  extra  real  output  
 Showing  non-­‐inflationary  growth  –  a  rise  in  AD  when  SRAS  is  elastic  
 

 
 
Inelastic  aggregate  supply  –  inflationary  pressures  are  strong  when  AD  is  increasing  
   

 
 
 
 
   

Page  46     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
12.Macroeconomic  Equilibrium  
Equilibrium  for  the  whole  economy  
1. Macro-­‐economic  equilibrium  is  established  when  AD  intersects  with  SRAS  
2. If  the  general  price  level  is  too  high,  there  will  be  an  excess  supply  of  output  and  producers  will  
experience  an  increase  in  unsold  stocks.  This  is  a  signal  to  cut  back  on  production  to  avoid  an  
excessive  level  of  inventories.    
3. If  the  price  level  is  below  equilibrium,  there  will  be  excess  demand  in  the  short  run  leading  to  a  
rundown  of  stocks  –  this  is  a  signal  for  businesses  to  expand  output.  
Equilibrium  is  where  the  level  of  income  flowing  round  the  system  is  constant  in  successive  time  periods.  
 
Macroeconomic  Equilibrium  using  AD-­‐AS  Diagrams  
 

 
 
Some  people  question  whether  it  can  ever  be  the  case  that  an  economy  can  come  close  to  reaching  
equilibrium  since  it  would  only  take  one  market  to  be  out  of  equilibrium  for  this  to  be  blocked?    
 
What  matters  here  is  whether  the  total  demand  for  goods  and  services  is  close  to  the  actual  level  of  
production  from  domestic  and  external  sources.    
 
Changes  in  Aggregate  Demand  
In  our  diagram  below  we  see  the  effect  of  an  increase  in  aggregate  demand  which  causes  an  expansion  of  
aggregate  supply  and  a  higher  equilibrium  level  of  national  output  /  income  (i.e.  higher  real  GDP)  
 
Impact  of  an  increase  in  Aggregate  Demand  
• An  increase  in  AD  causes  an  expansion  of  aggregate  supply  and  a  higher  equilibrium  level  of  
national  output  (i.e.  higher  real  GDP)  
• An  outward  shift  of  aggregate  demand  will  bring  about  a  cyclical  rise  in  output  and  employment.  

Page  47     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
 
 
Impact  of  an  increase  in  Aggregate  Supply  
• An  increase  in  aggregate  supply  causes  an  expansion  of  AD  and  a  higher  equilibrium  level  of  
national  output  (i.e.  higher  real  GDP)  
• An  outward  shift  of  aggregate  supply  e.g.  caused  by  lower  unit  costs  should  help  to  increase  
business  profits  and  prompt  a  rise  in  planned  capital  investment  
 

 
 
   

Page  48     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Impact  of  a  fall  in  Aggregate  Demand  
• A  decrease  in  aggregate  demand  causes  a  lower  equilibrium  level  of  national  output  

 
 
Impact  of  a  fall  in  Aggregate  Supply  
• A  decrease  in  AS  causes  a  contraction  of  AD  and  a  lower  equilibrium  level  of  national  output  
• An  inward  shift  of  AS  caused  by  a  rise  in  unit  resource  costs  will  lead  to  lower  business  profits.  
• The  effects  of  a  decrease  in  aggregate  supply  will  depend  on  the  cause.  A  fall  in  investment  can  be  
particularly  harmful  as  it  will  also  decrease  the  level  of  aggregate  demand  
 

 
 
Aggregate  supply  can  fall  both  in  the  short  run  and  the  long  run  –  some  of  the  possible  causes  are  outlined  
on  the  left  and  some  of  the  macroeconomic  effects  are  covered  on  the  right  
 
Page  49     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
Causes  of  Fall  in  AS   Possible  Macro  Consequences  

Brain  drain  –  an  outward  migraton  of  skilled  


workers   May  cause  higher  inflaton  

Steep  decline  in  business  capital  investment  


spending   May  reduce  real  GDP  growth  

Higher  producton  costs  from  higher  commodity   May  lead  to  lower  profits,  investment  and  
prices   employment  

Effects  of  a  major  natural  disaster  /  politcal  conflict   May  worsen  the  trade  balance  

 
 
 
Aggregate  supply  shocks  -­‐    Impact  of  rising  energy  prices  on  the  UK  Economy  
 
All  other  things  being  equal,  a  rise  in  the  global  price  of  energy  such  as  gas,  electricity  and  other  fuels  is  
most  likely  to  cause:  
 
Macroeconomic  Objective   Comment  on  the  Effect  

Inflation   Higher  –  at  least  in  short  term  

Economic  growth   Lower  –  negative  external  shock  

Unemployment   Higher  –  as  economy  slows  down  

Balance  of  trade  in  goods  &  services   Deterioration  –  rising  import  bills  

Spare  capacity  in  the  economy   Increase  –  from  weaker  growth  

Business  investment   Fall  –  higher  costs  hits  profits  

Government  fiscal  balance   Deterioration  –  less  tax  revenues  

 
 
   

Page  50     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
13.The  Economic  Cycle  
 
An  Economic  Cycle  
A  cycle  is  when  GDP  growth  fluctuates  around  the  trend  (or  underlying)  growth  
 
Key  Concepts  Linked  to  the  Economic  Cycle  
 
A  period  when  the  rate  of  growth  of  real  GDP  is  fast  and  higher  than  the  long-­‐term  
Boom  
trend.  This  is  likely  to  lead  to  a  positive  output  gap  

Business  cycle   Short-­‐run  fluctuations  of  national  output  (real  GDP)  around  its  long-­‐term  trend.  

National  income   Everything  produced,  earned  and  spent  in  a  country  over  a  period  of  time  
A  weakening  of  the  rate  of  growth,  real  GDP  is  still  rising  but  increasing  at  a  slower  
Slowdown  
rate  
A  period  of  at  least  six  months  when  an  economy  suffers  a  fall  in  output.  Or  a  
Recession  
broadly-­‐based  contraction  in  output,  employment,  investment  and  confidence  
A  phase  of  the  cycle,  after  a  recession,  during  which  real  GDP  starts  to  increase  and  
Recovery  
unemployment  begins  to  fall  
A  prolonged  downturn  in  the  economy  and  where  a  nation’s  real  GDP  falls  by  at  
Depression  
least  10  per  cent  from  peak  to  trough  
 
Real  GDP  Growth  in  the  UK  –  The  Economic  Cycle  
The  chart  shows  real  GDP  growth  for  the  UK  from  2010-­‐2014.  Data  for  2015  onwards  shows  forecast  
growth  using  data  from  the  International  Monetary  Fund  (IMF)  
 
3.5%  
GDP  growth  rate  compared  to  previous  year  

3.0%  

2.5%  

2.0%  

1.5%  

1.0%  

0.5%  

0.0%  
2010   2011   2012   2013   2014   2015*   2016*   2017*   2018*   2019*   2020*  
 
 
The  last  recession  in  the  UK  economy  was  in  2008  and  2009  when  there  was  a  cumulative  fall  in  real  
national  output  of  approximatelt  5  per  cent.  Since  then  the  economy  has  experienced  a  strengthening  
recovery  although  the  rate  of  growth  slowed  markedly  in  2012  when  there  were  fears  (unrealise)  of  a  
double-­‐dip  recession.  
Page  51     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
 
Economic  Recovery  and  the  PPF  Diagram  
 

 
Since  the  end  of  the  last  recession,  there  has  been  a  wide  variation  in  output  growth  in  different  British  
industries-­‐  the  data  I  the  chart  below  shows  the  average  %  pa  increase  in  output  from  Q3  2009  –  Q1  2015  
 

Prof  &  business  services   6.0%  


Retail  &  wholesale   3.2%  
Transport  &  comms   2.6%  
Property  services   2.4%  
Hotels  &  restaurants   2.1%  
Constructon   1.8%  
Other  services   1.8%  
Manufacturing   1.4%  
Water  &  waste   1.2%  
Agriculture   0.4%  
Electricity  &  gas   -­‐0.9%  
Finance/insurance   -­‐1.9%  
Mining,  oil,  etc   -­‐6.5%  

-­‐8%   -­‐6%   -­‐4%   -­‐2%   0%   2%   4%   6%   8%  


 
   

Page  52     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
The  Output  Gap  
• How  much  spare  capacity  does  an  economy  have  to  meet  a  rise  in  demand?    
• How  close  is  an  economy  to  operating  at  its  productive  potential?    
• Will  the  recession  have  a  permanent  effect  on  our  ability  to  supply  goods  and  services?    
The  output  gap  is  the  difference  between  the  actual  level  of  GDP  and  its  estimated  potential  level.  It  is  
usually  expressed  as  a  percentage  of  the  level  of  potential  output.  
 
Showing  a  negative  output  gap  using  an  AD-­‐AS  diagram  
   

 
 
Negative  output  gap  –  brings  downward  pressure  on  inflation  
• The  actual  level  of  real  GDP  is  given  by  the  intersection  of  AD  &  SRAS  –  the  short  run  equilibrium.    
• If  actual  GDP  is  less  than  potential  GDP  there  is  a  negative  output  gap  
• Some  factor  resources  such  as  labour  and  capital  machinery  are  under-­‐utilized;  the  main  problem  is  
likely  to  be  higher  unemployment.  
• More  people  out  of  work  indicate  an  excess  supply  of  labour,  which  causes  downward  pressure  on  
real  wage  rates.    
 
Positive  output  gap  –  creates  upward  pressure  on  inflation  
 
• If  actual  GDP  is  greater  than  potential  GDP  then  there  is  a  positive  output  gap.    
• Some  resources  including  labour  are  likely  to  be  working  beyond  their  normal  capacity  e.g.  making  
extra  use  of  shift  work  and  overtime.    
• The  main  problem  is  likely  to  be  an  acceleration  of  consumer  price  inflation.  
 

Page  53     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
 
 
Problems  in  Measuring  the  Output  Gap  
• The  output  gap  measures  the  difference  between  actual  real  GDP  and  its  potential  output.  
• Estimating  the  output  gap  is  difficult  because  we  cannot  observe  directly  the  supply  potential  of  an  
economy  directly  
Problems  in  estimating  the  output  gap  include:  
1. Inaccurate  data  on  the  labour  force  for  example  errors  in  measuring  net  inward  labour  migration  
2. Problems  in  accurately  measuring  productivity  
3. Surveys  of  producers  about  spare  capacity  may  be  inaccurate  
4. Gaps  in  knowledge  about  how  much  businesses  are  investing  and  the  potential  output  from  new  
capital  e.g.  in  digital  sectors  
5. Uncertainties  about  the  number  of  people  who  may  have  left  the  labour  market  as  “discouraged  
workers”  
6. It  is  hard  to  measure  the  amount  of  under-­‐employment  in  the  labour  market  at  different  stages  of  
the  economic  cycle  
   

Page  54     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
External  Shocks  and  the  Economic  Cycle  
 

Demand-­‐side  Shocks   Supply-­‐side  Shocks  

Steep  rise  in  oil  and  gas  prices  or  other  


Economic  downturn  in  a  trading  partner   commodites  

Unexpected  tax  increases   Politcal  turmoil  /  strikes  

Natural  disasters  causing  sharp  fall  in  


Financial  crisis  causing  bank  lending  to  fall   producton  

Unexpected  breakthroughs  in  producton  


Bigger  than  expected  rise  in  unemployment   technology  

 
 
Identifying  Possible  Causes  of  a  Recession  
 

External  events  

• A  recession  in  a  trading  partner  e.g.  the  European  Union  or  the  USA  
• A  sharp  rise  in  global  commodity  prices  e.g.  rising  oil  and  gas  prices  

Tightening  of  macro  policy  

• Higher  interest  rates  leading  to  more  expensive  loans    


• A  rise  in  taxaton  or  a  cut  in  government  spending  

Fall  in  asset  prices  or  supply  of  credit  

• Steep  decline  in  the  level  of  share  or  house  prices  
• A  collapse  in  the  supply  of  credit  (e.g.  Global  financial  crisis)  

Drop  in  business  and  consumer  confidence  

• Lower  business  confidence  cuts  investment  and  may  lead  to  job  losses  
• Declining  consumer  confidence  leads  to  less  spending  and  more  saving  
 
Page  55     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
Short  Term  Economic  Effects  of  a  Recession  
The  impact  of  a  recession  depends  in  part  on  causes  and  how  long  it  lasts  
 

Business  profits  and  capital  investment  

• Falling  demand  can  cause  more  businesses  to  fail  and  profits  fall  
• Planned  investment  declines  –  hi•ng  industries  that  make  the  capital  goods  

Unemployment  

• A  steep  decline  in  aggregate  demand  causes  a  fall  in  the  demand  for  labour  
• This  causes  a  contracton  in  employment  and  a  rise  in  cyclical  unemployment  

Government  finances  

• Recession  causes  a  decline  in  tax  revenues  and  more  welfare  spending  
• The  result  is  usually  an  increase  in  the  budget  deficit  and  a  rising  natonal  debt  

Inflaton  

• Many  business  offer  price  discounts  to  off-­‐load  excess  unsold  stocks  
• A  deep  recession  risks  causing  a  period  of  sustained  deflaton  (negatve  inflaton)  
 
 
Longer  Term  Economic  &  Social  Effects  of  a  Recession  
A  deep  recession  /  depression  can  having  economic  and  social  costs  
 

Long  Term  Economic  Effects   Long  Term  Social  Effects  

Rising  structural  long-­‐term  unemployment   Falling  real  wages  hits  average  living  standards  
and  regional  decline   and  reduces  demand    

Low  rates  of  investment  can  reduce  the  size  of   Widening  inequality  of  income  and  wealth  
the  capital  stock   leading  to  rising  poverty  

Persistent  budget  (fiscal)  deficits  and  a  rising  


natonal  debt  leads  to  austerity  (cut  in  public   Social  costs    such  as  loss  of  social  cohesion  and  
threats  to  democracy  
services)  

 
 
 
Page  56     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
Effects  of  Recession  -­‐  Hysteresis  v  Creative  Destruction  
 
Here  are  two  competing  views  about  the  effects  of  a  recession  

Creakve  
Hysteresis   When  an  economy  is  disabled  by   Destruckon   Recessions  can  cast  a  dark  
recession  there  is  a  big  risk  of  a   shadow  but  capitalist  market  
permanent  loss  of  natonal   economies  usually  bounce  back  
output   eventually  

Recessions  prompt  the  


Loss  of  productve  capacity  due   emergence  of  new  business  
to  low  capital  investment  +  many   models  and  an  increase  in  start-­‐
business  closures   ups  

High  rates  of  structural   New  technologies  can  act  as  a  


unemployment  may  cause  a   catalyst  for  renewed  economic  
shrinking  labour  force  perhaps   growth  and  investment  
through  outward  migraton  

 
 
 
The  Difference  between  Recession  and  Depression  
A  depression  is  a  prolonged  slump  over  a  number  of  years  where  real  GDP  falls  by  more  than  10%  from  the  
peak  of  the  cycle  to  the  trough.  
 
Real  Per  Capita  Income  in  Greece  2010-­‐2020  (Source  IMF)  
 
30000  

25000  
GDP  per  capita  in  U.S.  dollars  

20000  

15000  

10000  

5000  

0  
2010   2011   2012   2013   2014   2015*   2016*   2017*   2018*   2019*   2020*  
 
 
   

Page  57     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Measuring  the  Misery  Index!  
• The  Misery  Index  is  a  light-­‐hearted  attempt  to  use  macroeconomic  data  to  track  the  scale  and  
extent  of  misery  for  different  countries.  
• The  misery  index  is  calculated  according  to  this  formula:  
• Uneployment  rate  +  official  interest  rate  +  the  inflation  rate  minus  the  percent  change  in  real  GDP  
per  capita  of  a  country  
Data  for  the  Misery  Index  in  2014  
 

Misery  index  score  


0   20   40   60   80   100   120  
Venezuela   106.03  
Argentna   68  
Syria   63.9  
Ukraine   51.8  
Iran   49.1  
Brazil   42.79  
Sao  Tome  And  Principe   42.06  
Serbia   40.32  
Jamaica   39.85  
South  Africa   39.16  
Sudan   38.71  
Macedonia   36.53  
Kyrgyzstan   35.17  
Belarus   34.81  
Armenia   34.45  
\  
 
Why  is  GDP  growth  difficult  to  forecast?  
When  economists  make  forecasts  about  the  future  path  for  an  economy  they  have  to  accept  the  
inevitability  of  forecast  errors.    
 

Uncertain  
business  
confidence  levels  

Rate  of  business  


job  creaton  hard   Fluctuatons  in  
exchange  rate  
to  forecast    

Uncertain  
reactons  to   External  events  
e.g.  volatle  oil  
macro  policy  
and  gas  prices  
changes  
 
 

Page  58     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
14.Multiplier  and  Accelerator  Effects  
What  is  the  multiplier  process?  
• An  initial  change  in  aggregate  demand  can  have  a  much  greater  final  impact  on  the  level  of  
equilibrium  national  income  (GDP)  
• This  is  known  as  the  multiplier  effect  
• It  comes  about  because  injections  of  new  demand  for  goods  and  services  into  the  circular  flow  of  
income  stimulate  further  rounds  of  spending  leading  to  an  expansion  of  output,  incomes  and  
profits  
• In  other  words  “one  person’s  spending  is  another’s  income”  
• This  can  lead  to  a  bigger  final  effect  on  output  and  employment  
• The  multiplier  is  a  number  –  a  coefficient  showing  the  size  of  the  final  impact  on  national  income  
What  is  a  simple  definition  of  the  multiplier?  
It  is  the  number  of  times  a  rise  in  national  income  exceeds  the  rise  in  injections  of  demand  that  caused  it  
 
Examples  of  the  multiplier  effect  at  work  
• Consider  a  £300  million  increase  in  capital  investment–  for  example  created  when  an  overseas  
company  decides  to  build  a  new  production  plant  in  the  UK  
• This  can  set  off  a  chain  reaction  of  increases  in  expenditures.    
• Firms  who  produce  the  capital  goods  and  construction  businesses  who  win  contracts  to  build  the  
new  factory  will  see  an  increase  in  their  incomes  and  profits  
• If  they  and  their  employees  in  turn,  collectively  spend  about  3/5  of  that  additional  income,  then  
£180m  will  be  added  to  the  incomes  of  others.    
At  this  point,  total  income  has  grown  by  (£300m  +  (0.6  x  £300m).  
 
The  sum  will  continue  to  increase  as  the  producers  of  the  additional  goods  and  services  realize  an  increase  
in  their  incomes,  of  which  they  in  turn  spend  60%  on  even  more  goods  and  services.    
 
The  increase  in  total  income  will  then  be  (£300m  +  (0.6  x  £300m)  +  (0.6  x  £180m).  
 
Each  time,  the  extra  spending  and  income  is  a  fraction  of  the  previous  addition  to  the  circular  flow.  
 
Positive  Multiplier  and  Negative  Multiplier  Effects  
 

Positve  multplier   Negatve  multplier  

When  an  inital  increase  in  an   When  an  inital  decrease  in  an  
injecton  (or  a  decrease  in  a   injecton  (or  an  increase  in  a  
leakage)  leads  to  a  greater  final   leakage)  leads  to  a  greater  final  
increase  in  real  GDP.   decrease  in  real  GDP.  

 
   
Page  59     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
Importance  of  the  Marginal  Propensity  to  Consume  and  Save  

Marginal  propensity  to  consume  (MPC)   Marginal  propensity  to  save  (MPS)  

MPC  =  change  in  consumpton  following  a   MPS  =  change  in  savings  following  a  change  
change  in  income   in  income  

=  change  in  total  consumpton  /  change  in   =  change  in  total  savings  /  change  in  gross  
gross  income   income  
E.g.  if  gross  income  increases  by  £5,000  and  
spending  rises  by  £4,000  then  the  MPC  =   If  rise  in  gross  income  =  £5,000  and  rise  in  C  
=  £4,000,  then  change  in  saving  =  £1,000  
£4,000  /  £5,000  =  0.8  

Therefore  MPS  =  £1,000  /  £5,000  =  0  

 
 
Marginal  Rate  of  Leakage  and  the  Multiplier  Value  
 

Page  60     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Simple  and  a  more  complex  Multiplier  Calculation  
 

Simple  Multplier   More  Complex  Multplier  

Three  leakages  (savings,  


Assume  no  tax  or  imports   imports  and  taxaton)  

Multplier  coefficient  k  =  1  /  
Only  leakage  is  saving   (MPS  +MRT  +  MPM)  

Multplier  coefficient  k  =  1  /   If  sum  of  marginal  rate  of  


(1-­‐MPC)   leakage  =  0.7  

Then  multplier  =  1/0.7  =  


If  MPC  =  0.8   1.43  

Then  multplier  =  1  /  (1-­‐0.8)  


=  1/0.2  =  5  
 
 
The  main  factors  that  affect  the  value  (coefficient)  of  the  multiplier  effect  
 

Propensity  
to  import  

Avoiding  
crowding   Propensity  
to  save  
out  
The  value  of  the  
multplier  

Amount  of  
spare   Propensity  
to  tax  
capacity  

 
 
1. The  multiplier  process  requires  that  there  is  sufficient  spare  capacity  for  extra  output  to  be  
produced.  If  short-­‐run  aggregate  supply  is  inelastic,  the  full  multiplier  effect  is  unlikely  to  occur,  
because  increases  in  AD  will  lead  to  higher  prices  rather  than  a  full  increase  in  real  national  output.  
In  contrast,  when  SRAS  is  perfectly  elastic  a  rise  in  AD  causes  a  large  increase  in  national  output.  
2. Crowding  out  –  this  is  where  (for  example)  increased  government  spending  or  lower  taxes  can  lead  
to  a  rise  in  government  borrowing  and/or  inflation  which  causes  interest  rates  to  rise  and  has  the  
effect  of  slowing  down  economic  activity.  
   
Page  61     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
In  short  –  the  multiplier  effect  will  be  larger  when  
 
1. The  propensity  to  spend  extra  income  on  domestic  goods  and  services  is  high  
2. The  marginal  rate  of  tax  on  extra  income  is  low  
3. The  propensity  to  spend  extra  income  rather  than  save  is  high  
4. Consumer  confidence  is  high  (this  affects  willingness  to  spend  gains  in  income)  
5. Businesses  in  the  economy  have  the  capacity  to  expand  production  to  meet  increases  in  demand  
 
Time  lags  and  the  multiplier  effect  
• It  is  important  to  remember  that  the  multiplier  effect  will  take  time  to  come  into  full  effect  
• A  good  example  is  the  fiscal  stimulus  introduced  into  the  US  economy  by  the  Obama  government.  
They  have  set  aside  many  billions  of  dollars  of  extra  spending  on  infrastructure  spending  but  these  
capital  projects  can  take  years  to  be  completed.  Delays  in  sourcing  raw  materials,  components  and  
finding  sufficient  skilled  labour  can  limit  the  initial  impact  of  the  spending  projects.  
Elasticity  of  Aggregate  Supply  &  the  Multiplier  Effect    
 

 
The  Multiplier  and  Keynesian  Economics  
• The  concept  of  the  multiplier  process  became  important  in  the  1930s  when  John  Maynard  Keynes  
suggested  it  as  a  tool  to  help  governments  to  maintain  high  levels  of  employment  
• This  “demand-­‐management  approach”,  designed  to  help  overcome  a  shortage  of  capital  
investment,  measured  the  amount  of  government  spending  needed  to  reach  a  level  of  national  
income  that  would  prevent  unemployment.    
 
 
   

Page  62     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
15.Economic  Growth  
What  is  meant  by  economic  growth?  
• Economic  growth  is  a  long-­‐term  expansion  of  productive  potential  
• Short  term  growth  is  the  annual  %  change  in  real  national  output  
• Long  term  growth  is  shown  by  an  increase  in  trend  or  potential  GDP  
Fastest  Growing  Countries  in  2015  
The  table  below  is  taken  from  the  IMF  world  economic  outlook  and  shows  projected  real  GDP  growth  
 

Real  GDP  growth  compared  to  previous  year  (per  cent),  Source:  IMF  
0.0%   5.0%   10.0%   15.0%   20.0%   25.0%  
Papua  New  Guinea   19.33%  
Congo   9.19%  
Turkmenistan   9%  
Ethiopia   8.56%  
Myanmar   8.33%  
Côte  d'Ivoire   7.75%  
Chad   7.59%  
Bhutan   7.56%  
India   7.46%  
Lao  P.D.R.   7.31%  
Tanzania   7.23%  
Cambodia   7.2%  
Qatar   7.13%  
Rwanda   7%  
Kenya   6.86%  
 
 
Distinction  between  Short  Run  and  Long  Run  Economic  Growth  

Short  term  economic  growth   Long  run  economic  growth  

Cyclical  changes  in  real  GDP   Potental  output  /  trend  growth  

Changes  in  AD  (C+I+G+X-­‐M)   Productvity  of  labour  &  capital  

Technological  progress  and  strength  


Changes  in  short  run  AS   of  enterprise  
Short  term  external  shocks  to  both  
demand  and  supply   Changes  in  the  labour  force  

Short  term  policy  changes  e.g.  


changes  in  interest  rates   Investment  rates  
 
 

Page  63     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
 
Key  Factors  Affecting  Short  Run  Economic  Growth  
 

Interest  rates  set  by  the  central   Fiscal  policy  -­‐  government   Commodity  prices  such  as  oil,  
bank   spending  and  taxaton   gas  and  foodstuffs  

Exchange  rates  e.g.   Trading  conditons  /  economic   Confidence  of  businesses  and  
appreciaton  or  depreciaton   growth  in  other  countries   households  (animal  spirits)  

 
Key  Factors  Affecting  Long  Run  Economic  Growth  
 

Capital  Investment   Factor  Productvity   Growth  of  the  Labour  supply  

Research  and  Development   Innovaton   Enterprise  and  A•tudes  to  Risk-­‐


Taking  

 
 
Page  64     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
Economic  Growth  using  PPF  Diagrams  
 

 
 
Economic  growth  is  a  sustained  rise  in  a  country’s  productive  potential  and  real  national  output.    
 
What  are  the  main  Benefits  of  Economic  Growth?  
 

Higher  living  standards  –  i.e.  Real  GNI  per  capita  –  helps  to  liz  people  out  of  extreme  
poverty  and  improve  development  outcomes  (e.g.  rising  HDI)  

Employment  effects  –  sustained  growth  stmulates  jobs  and  contributes  to  lower  
unemployment  rates  which  is  turn  helps  to  reduce  inequality.  

Fiscal  dividend  –  higher  economic  growth  will  raise  tax  revenues  and  reduce  government  
spending  on  unemployment-­‐related  welfare  benefits  

Accelerator  effect  -­‐  rising  growth  stmulates  new  investment  e.g.  in  low-­‐carbon  
technologies.  Bewer  growth  may  awract  foreign  direct  investment  projects  

 
 
   

Page  65     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Is  there  a  Virtuous  Circle  of  Growth?  

Higher  
output  

Rising  
consumer   Increased  
investment  
demand  

Increased   Higher  
wages   productvity  

 
 
Three  Perspectives  on  Economic  Growth  –  Balanced,  Sustainable  and  Inclusive  Growth  
 

Balanced  Growth   Sustainable  Growth   Inclusive  Growth  

Sector  balance  e.g.  between   Benefits  of  growth  widely  


industries   Meets  the  needs  of  current   distributed  
generations  without  limiting  
Regional  balance   resources  for  future  generations   Rising  median  per  capita  incomes  

Progress  in  reducing  relative  


Urban  /  rural  balance   Macroeconomic  stability  
poverty  
Internal  v  external  balance  (e.g.   Improving  opportunities  for  all  
Financial  stability  
BoP)   groups  

Balance  between  consumption   Environmental  sustainability  –   Measures  to  tackle  discrimination  


and  investment   protection  of  natural  capital   and  barriers  for  affected  groups  

 
   

Page  66     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
How  Best  to  Sustain  Economic  Growth  in  the  Long  Run  

Improving  Insttutons  and  


Building  Trust  /  Social  Capital   Growing  Intra-­‐Regional  Trade   Protectng  Property  Rights  

Growing  a  Dynamic  Innovatve   Sound  Macro  Policies  to  control   Focusing  on  addressing  Equity  /  
Private  Sector   Inflatonary  Pressures   Fairness  Issues  
 
 
Capital  Investment’s  Contribution  to  Economic  Growth  

Provides  an  injecton  of  demand  for   Bigger  capital  stock  can  liz  productvity  /  
capital  goods  industries   incomes  e.g.  in  farming  

Economies  of  scale  &  bewer   Investment  helps  to  sustain  export-­‐led  
compettveness  lower  prices   growth  adding  to  GDP  growth  
 

Page  67     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Policies  to  attract  Inward  Foreign  Investment  
Many  countries  rely  on  foreign  direct  investment  (FDI)  as  a  key  source  of  extra  demand  and  as  a  driver  of  
growth  

Awractve  rates  of   Soz  loans  and  tax   Trade  and  Investment  
corporaton  tax   reliefs  /  other  subsidies   Agreements   Flexible  labour  markets  

Open  capital  markets  


Special  Economic   High  quality   to  allow  remiwed   Availability  of  low  cost  
Zones   infrastructure   labour  
profits  

Economic  and  Social  Costs  of  Growth  


High  rates  of  GDP  growth  can  bring  about  undesirable  economic  and  social  costs  
 

Risks  of  higher  inflakon  and  higher  interest  rates  


• Fast-­‐growing  demand  can  lead  to  demand-­‐pull  and  cost-­‐push  inflaton  –  this  
leads  to  a  conflict  between  macro  objectves  
• The  central  bank  may  decide  to  raise  interest  rates  to  control  inflaton  

Environmental  effects  
• More  negatve  externalites  such  as  polluton  &  waste  
• Risk  of  unsustainable  extracton  of  finite  resources  –  i.e.  fast  growing  countries  
may  cause  a  long-­‐run  depleton  of  natural  resources  

Inequalikes  of  income  and  wealth  


• Rapid  increases  in  real  natonal  income  can  lead  to  a  higher  level  of  inequality  
and  social  divisions  
• Many  of  the  gains  from  growth  may  go  to  only  a  few  people  

 
 
Page  68     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
Economic  Growth  and  Inequality  
• Not  all  of  the  benefits  of  growth  are  evenly  distributed.  A  rise  in  real  GDP  can  lift  millions  of  people  
out  of  absolute  poverty  but  it  can  often  be  accompanied  by  widening  income  and  wealth  
inequality  in  society  that  is  reflected  in  an  increase  in  relative  poverty  
• If  inequality  grows  as  a  country  becomes  richer,  this  raises  important  questions  about  a  potential  
trade-­‐off  between  equity  and  efficiency  
Countries  with  the  Highest  Income  Inequality  (2012)  
The  table  below  shows  the  countries  with  the  highest  income  inequality  as  measured  by  the  Gini  
Coefficient.  The  maximum  value  for  the  Gini  Index  is  100.    
 

Inequality  as  measured  by  the  Gini  Index  


0   10   20   30   40   50   60   70  

Seychelles   65.8  
Comoros   64.3  
Namibia   63.9  
South  Africa   63.1  
Micronesia  (Federated  States  of)   61.1  
Hait   59.2  
Zambia   57.5  
Honduras   57  
Central  African  Republic   56.3  
Bolivia  (Plurinatonal  State  of)   56.3  
Colombia   55.9  
Guatemala   55.9  
Brazil   54.7  
Belize   53.1  
Suriname   52.9  
 
 
Data  on  Income  Inequality  in  the  United  Kingdom  
 
Real  Household  Disposable  Income  (£  per  year,  at  constant  2013/14  prices)  Source:  ONS  
Mean   Mean  
Median   80/20  Ratio   Gini  Coefficient  
  Bottom  quintile   Top  quintile  
£   £   £   Ratio  
   
1979   13,373   6,843   27,142   3.97   27  
1989   16,966   7,448   42,156   5.66   34  
1999   20,709   8,743   54,036   6.18   36  

           
2007/2008   25,001   10,945   63,444   5.80   34  
2010/2011   24,320   11,699   62,958   5.38   34  
2013/2014   24,500   11,286   59,505   5.27   32  
 
 
Page  69     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
What  can  limit  the  rate  of  economic  growth?  
 

Weaknesses  Infrastructure   Primary  Export  Dependency  

Macro  Instability   Conflict  and  Corrupton  

Human  Capital  Weaknesses   Savings  and  Foreign  Exchange  Gap  

Natural  Capital  Depleton   High  levels  of  Inequality  


 
   

Page  70     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Economic  Growth  of  China  
• China  has  experienced  rapid  growth  over  the  last  twenty  years  helping  to  lift  hundreds  of  millions  
of  people  out  of  deep  poverty  
• Real  GDP  growth  has  been  over  9%  per  year  since  1979  but  that  growth  is  now  slowing  down  
• The  government  has  set  a  new  growth  target  for  real  GDP  to  grow  by  7  per  cent  each  year  
• Much  of  the  growth  in  China  over  the  last  twenty  years  has  come  from  very  high  rates  of  
investment  and  strong  exports  leading  to  a  rising  trade  surplus  
• Estimates  find  that  of  the  growth  achieved  by  China  over  the  last  twenty-­‐five  years:  
o 60-­‐70%  has  come  from  increasing  capital  and  labour  inputs  
o 30-­‐40%  has  come  from  rising  factor  productivity  
• Looking  at  increases  in  per  capita  output  research  finds  that:  
o 11-­‐14%  from  improving  human  capital  (quality  of  labour)  
o 8-­‐14%  from  improving  allocative  efficiency  (e.g.  moving  from  state-­‐owned  businesses  to  
private  and  from  rural  to  urban)  
o 16-­‐17%  has  come  from  the  productivity-­‐enhancing  effects  of  innovatin  
 Real  GDP  Growth  for  China  since  1997  
 

15  

10  

5  
1997   2000   2003   2006   2009   2012   2015  

 
China  in  transition  to  a  more  sustainable  and  balanced  growth  rate  
China  is  now  in  a  period  of  transition  away  from  the  fast  export  and  investment-­‐led  growth  of  the  last  20  
years.  The  service  sector  is  likely  to  take  a  bigger  share  of  GDP  in  the  years  ahead.  In  2014,  it  still  accounted  
for  less  than  50  per  cent  of  Chinese  national  output.  
   
Economic  reform  challenges  facing  China  
• More  reliance  on  their  own  domestic  market  and  less  on  exports  
• Raise  consumption  and  reduce  inefficient  savings  
• Grow  the  private  sector  and  reduce  distortions  from  state-­‐owned  sector  
• Increase  the  pace  of  innovation  as  imitation  limits  are  reached  
• Continue  to  integrate  the  Chinese  economy  into  the  global  economic  /  financial  system  
Changes  in  the  rate  of  growth  and  type  of  growth  in  China  will  have  profound  effects  on  many  other  
countries  –  not  least  China’s  main  trade  and  investment  partners  in  developed  and  developing  countries.  
Page  71     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
16.Inflation  
 
What  is  inflation?  
• Inflation  is  a  sustained  increase  in  the  cost  of  living  or  the  general  price  level  leading  to  a  fall  in  the  
purchasing  power  of  money  
How  is  the  rate  of  inflation  measured?  
• The  rate  of  inflation  is  measured  by  the  annual  percentage  change  in  consumer  prices  
• The  UK  government  has  set  an  inflation  target  of  2%  using  the  consumer  prices  index  (CPI)  
• It  is  the  job  of  the  Bank  of  England  (BoE)  to  set  monetary  policy  interest  rates  so  that  inflationary  
pressures  are  controlled  and  the  inflation  target  is  reached  
Falling  inflation  does  not  mean  falling  prices!  
• A  slowdown  in  inflation  is  not  the  same  as  deflation!  For  this  to  happen,  the  annual  rate  of  price  
inflation  would  have  to  be  negative.  
• Disinflation  describes  a  period  when  the  rate  of  inflation  is  falling,  i.e.  prices  are  rising  at  a  slower  
pace  
Inflation  –  Some  Key  Terms  
 
A  measure  of  the  price  level  in  the  economy  based  on  the  prices  of  a  
Consumer  Price  Index  (CPI)   collection  of  products  designed  to  reflect  the  consumption  basket  of  the  
average  consumer  
A  decline  in  the  general  price  level  in  an  economy,  signified  by  an  annual  
Deflation  
inflation  rate  below  0%  (negative).  
Disinflation  is  a  fall  in  the  rate  of  inflation  e.g.  from  5%  to  2%.  Prices  are  
Disinflation  
still  rising  but  at  a  slower  rate.  
A  period  of  very  high  rates  of  inflation,  usually  leading  to  a  loss  of  
Hyper-­‐inflation  
confidence  in  an  economy’s  currency.  

Inflation  rate   The  annual  rate  of  change  of  the  average  price  of  goods  and  services.  

Reflect  total  labour  costs,  including  social  security  and  employers’  pension  
Unit  labour  costs   contributions,  and  including  the  costs  of  self-­‐employed  labour,  incurred  in  
the  production  of  a  unit  of  economic  output.  
 
How  is  the  Rate  of  Inflation  Calculated?  
• Inflation  in  the  UK  is  measured  by  the  consumer  prices  index  (CPI)  
• A  base  year  is  selected  and  an  expenditure  survey  carried  out  –  the  survey  covers  40,000  
households  
• A  representative  basket  of  goods  and  services  used  and  weights  are  attached  to  each  item  -­‐  based  
on  these  items’  importance  in  people’s  expenditure  as  measured  the  family  spending  survey  
• Each  month  government  officials  collect  120,000  separate  price  quotations  in  141  locations  of  
around  600  products  
• Weights  are  multiplied  by  price  changes  -­‐  the  weighted  price  changes  are  then  totalled  to  calculate  
the  inflation  rate    
• At  the  start  of  each  year  the  weights  used  to  compile  both  the  CPI  are  updated  using  the  latest  
information  on  household  spending  
Page  72     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
An  example  of  how  to  calculate  a  weighted  price  index  
 
The  table  below  shows  a  made-­‐up  listing  of  spending  categories  together  with  price  index  data  and  the  
weight  attached  to  each  category.  From  this  information  a  weighted  price  index  can  be  calculated:  
 
Category   Price  Index   Weighting   Price  x  Weight  
Food   104   19   1976  
Alcohol  &  Tobacco   110   5   550  
Clothing   96   12   1152  
Transport   108   14   1512  
Housing   106   23   2438  
Leisure  Services   102   9   918  
Household  Goods   95   10   950  
Other  Items   114   8   912  
    100   10408  
 
Weights  are  attached  to  each  category;  we  multiply  these  weights  to  the  price  index  for  each  item  of  
spending  for  a  given  year.  
• The  price  index  for  this  year  is:  the  sum  of  (price  x  weight)  /  sum  of  the  weights  

• So  the  price  index  for  this  year  is  104.1  (rounding  to  one  decimal  place)  

• The  rate  of  inflation  is  the  %  change  in  the  price  index  from  one  year  to  another.    
• So  if  in  one  year  the  price  index  is  104.1  and  a  year  later  the  price  index  has  risen  to  112.5,  then  the  
annual  rate  of  inflation  =  (112.5  –  104.1)  divided  by  104.1  x  100.  Thus  the  rate  of  inflation  =  8.07%.  
Weighting  the  Consumer  Price  Index  in  the  UK  
 
Category  in  the  CPI   Weights   CPI  in  June  2014   CPI  in  June  2015  
Food  and  non-­‐alcoholic  beverages   110   143.2   140.1  
Alcoholic  beverages  and  tobacco   43   156.5   160.1  
Clothing  and  footwear   70   83.4   82.8  
Housing,  water,  electricity,  gas  and  other  fuels   128   154.7   155.4  
Furniture,  household  equipment  and  
59   120.9   120.5  
maintenance  
Health   25   130.0   132.0  
Transport   149   137.6   135.0  
Communication   31   112.5   113.7  
Recreation  and  culture   147   102.9   101.9  
Education   26   222.2   244.3  
Restaurants  and  hotels   121   132.6   135.1  
Miscellaneous  goods  and  services     91   120.3   120.5  
Overall  consumer  price  index   1000   128.3   128.2  
 
   

Page  73     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Limitations  of  the  Consumer  Price  Index  as  a  measure  of  inflation    
 
The  published  figure  for  inflation  is  rarely  the  actual  rate  of  inflation  experienced  by  different  people  
1. The  CPI  is  not  fully  representative  -­‐  it  will  be  inaccurate  for  the  ‘non-­‐typical’  household,  e.g.  14%  of  
the  CPI  index  is  devoted  to  motoring  costs  -­‐  inapplicable  for  non-­‐car  owners.    
2. Spending  patterns:  e.g.  Single  people  have  different  spending  patterns  from  households  that  have  
one  or  more  children  
3. Changing  quality  of  goods  and  services:  Although  the  price  of  a  good  or  service  may  rise,  this  may  
also  be  accompanied  by  improvements  in  quality  /  performance  of  the  product  
4. New  products:  The  CPI  is  slow  to  respond  to  new  products  and  services  –  the  CPI  basket  is  changed  
each  year  but  only  a  few  items  fall  out  /  come  in  
UK  Consumer  Price  Index  (CPI)  from  2000-­‐2015  
• The  chart  below  tracks  the  annual  value  for  the  consumer  price  index.  From  this  data  the  annual  
inflation  rate  can  be  calculated.  
• Note  that  the  CPI  in  2015  is  expected  to  be  the  same  as  in  2014,  implying  a  zero  rate  of  inflation  
 
140  

128   128  
130   126.1  
Consumer  Price  Index  (2005=100)  

123  
119.6  
120  
114.5  
110.8  
108.5  
110  
104.7  
102.3  
100  
98  
100  
94.2   95.4   96.7  
93.1  

90  

80  
2000   2001   2002   2003   2004   2005   2006   2007   2008   2009   2010   2011   2012   2013   2014   2015  
 
 
   

Page  74     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Inflation  Rate  in  the  UK  Economy  in  Recent  Years  
The  CPI  inflation  target  for  the  Bank  of  England  is  2%  plus  or  minus  1%  
 
5.0%  
4.5%  
4.5%  

4.0%  
3.6%  
3.5%   3.3%  

3.0%   2.8%  
Inflaton  rate  

2.6%  
2.5%   2.3%   2.3%  
2.2%  
2.1%  
2.0%  
1.5%  
1.4%  
1.5%   1.3%   1.3%  
1.2%  

1.0%   0.8%  

0.5%  

0.0%  
2000   2001   2002   2003   2004   2005   2006   2007   2008   2009   2010   2011   2012   2013   2014  
 
 
CPI  Inflation  in  the  UK  over  the  last  20  Years  (Detail  for  Goods  and  Services)  
The  inflation  rate  for  goods  such  as  clothing  and  computers  has  been,  on  average,  lower  than  for  service  
such  as  car  and  home  insurance  and  education  and  services  such  as  hairdressing  and  leisure  clubs.  
 

-1 CPI all items


CPI goods
-2
CPI services
-3
1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014
JAN JAN JAN JAN JAN JAN JAN JAN JAN JAN JAN JAN JAN JAN JAN JAN JAN JAN JAN JAN
 
 
Page  75     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
The  UK  Inflation  Target  
• The  Bank  of  England’s  target  is  for  inflation  to  be  2%.    
• The  Governor  of  the  Bank  of  England  must  write  an  open  letter  to  the  Chancellor  if  inflation  is  more  
than  one  percentage  point  higher  or  lower  than  this  target  (i.e.  more  than  3%  or  less  1%).    
• CPI  Inflation  in  the  UK  has  been  either  above  3%  or  less  than  1%  in  25  of  57  months  since  May  2010  
Key  Inflation  Data  for  the  UK  in  Recent  Years  
 
UK  Whole  
UK  Consumer  Price   Halifax  House  Price   Inflation  in  the  
Year   Economy  Average  
Inflation   Inflation   European  Union  
Earnings  
Per  cent   Per  cent   Per  cent   Per  cent  
 
2011   4.5   2.5   -­‐2.5   3.1  
2012   2.8   1.4   -­‐0.6   2.6  
2013   2.6   1.2   4.6   1.5  
2014   1.5   1.1   8.8   0.6  
2015  (April)   0.1   2.7   8.6   0.3  
 
What  are  the  Main  Causes  of  Inflation?  
• Inflation  can  come  from  both  the  demand  and  the  supply-­‐side  of  an  economy  
• Inflation  can  arise  from  internal  and  external  events  
o Some  inflationary  pressures  direct  from  the  domestic  economy,  for  example  the  decisions  
of  utility  businesses  providing  electricity  or  gas  or  water  on  their  tariffs  for  the  year  ahead,  
or  the  pricing  strategies  of  the  food  retailers  based  on  the  strength  of  demand  and  
competitive  pressure  in  their  markets.    
o A  rise  in  the  rate  of  VAT  would  also  be  a  cause  of  increased  domestic  inflation  in  the  short  
term  because  it  increases  a  firm’s  production  costs.  
o Inflation  can  also  come  from  external  sources,  for  example  a  sustained  rise  in  the  price  of  
crude  oil  or  other  imported  commodities,  foodstuffs  and  beverages.    
o Fluctuations  in  the  exchange  rate  can  also  affect  inflation  –  for  example  a  fall  in  the  value  
of  the  pound  against  other  currencies  might  cause  higher  import  prices  for  items  such  as  
foodstuffs  from  Western  Europe  or  technology  supplies  from  the  United  States  –  which  
feeds  through  directly  or  indirectly  into  the  consumer  price  index.  
Demand-­‐Pull  Inflation  
• Demand  pull  inflation  occurs  when  aggregate  demand  is  growing  at  an  unsustainable  rate  leading  
to  increased  pressure  on  scarce  resources  and  a  positive  output  gap  
• When  there  is  excess  demand,  producers  can  raise  their  prices  and  achieve  bigger  profit  margins  
• Demand-­‐pull  inflation  becomes  a  threat  when  an  economy  has  experienced  a  boom  with  GDP  rising  
faster  than  the  long-­‐run  trend  growth  of  potential  GDP  
• Demand-­‐pull  inflation  is  likely  when  there  is  full  employment  of  resources  and  SRAS  is  inelastic  
Main  Causes  of  Demand-­‐Pull  Inflation  
1. A  depreciation  of  the  exchange  rate  increases  the  price  of  imports  and  reduces  the  foreign  price  of  
a  country’s  exports.    If  consumers  buy  fewer  imports,  while  exports  grow,  AD  in  will  rise  –  and  there  
may  be  a  multiplier  effect  on  the  level  of  demand  and  output  
2. Higher  demand  from  a  fiscal  stimulus  e.g.  from  lower  direct  or  indirect  taxes  or  higher  government  
spending.    If  direct  taxes  are  reduced,  consumers  have  more  disposable  income  causing  demand  to  
Page  76     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
rise.  Higher  government  spending  and  increased  borrowing  creates  extra  demand  in  the  circular  
flow  
3. Monetary  stimulus:  A  fall  in  interest  rates  may  stimulate  too  much  demand  –  for  example  in  raising  
demand  for  loans  or  in  leading  to  house  price  inflation.  Monetarist  economists  believe  that  
inflation  is  caused  by  “too  much  money,  chasing  too  few  goods”  and  that  governments  can  lose  
control  of  inflation  if  they  allow  banks  to  expand  the  money  supply  too  quickly.  
4. Fast  growth  in  other  countries  –  providing  a  boost  to  UK  exports  overseas.  Export  sales  provide  an  
extra  flow  of  income  and  spending  into  the  UK  circular  flow  –  so  what  is  happening  to  the  economic  
cycles  of  other  countries  definitely  affects  the  UK  
 

 
 
Cost-­‐Push  Inflation  
Cost-­‐push  inflation  occurs  when  businesses  respond  to  rising  costs,  by  increasing  prices  to  protect  their  
profit  margins.  There  are  many  reasons  why  costs  might  rise:  

1. Component  costs:  e.g.  an  increase  in  the  prices  of  raw  materials  and  other  components.  This  might  
be  because  of  a  rise  in  commodity  prices  such  as  oil,  copper  and  agricultural  products  used  in  food  
processing.  A  recent  example  has  been  a  surge  in  the  world  price  of  wheat.    

2. Rising  labour  costs  -­‐  caused  by  wage  increases,  which  are  greater  than  improvements  in  
productivity.  Wage  costs  often  rise  when  unemployment  is  low  because  skilled  workers  become  
scarce  and  this  can  drive  pay  levels  higher.  Wages  might  increase  when  people  expect  higher  
inflation  so  they  ask  for  more  pay  in  order  to  protect  their  real  incomes.  Trade  unions  may  use  
their  bargaining  power  to  bid  for  and  achieve  increasing  wages,  this  could  be  a  cause  of  cost-­‐push  
inflation  

3. Expectations  of  inflation  are  important  in  shaping  what  actually  happens  to  inflation.  When  people  
see  prices  are  rising  for  everyday  items  they  get  concerned  about  the  effects  of  inflation  on  their  
real  standard  of  living.  One  of  the  dangers  of  a  pick-­‐up  in  inflation  is  what  the  Bank  of  England  calls  
“second-­‐round  effects”  i.e.  an  initial  rise  in  prices  triggers  a  burst  of  higher  pay  claims  as  workers  
look  to  protect  their  way  of  life.  This  is  also  known  as  a  “wage-­‐price  effect”  

Page  77     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
4. Higher  indirect  taxes  –  for  example  a  rise  in  the  duty  on  alcohol,  fuels  and  cigarettes,  or  a  rise  in  
Value  Added  Tax.  Depending  on  the  price  elasticity  of  demand  and  supply  for  their  products,  
suppliers  may  choose  to  pass  on  the  burden  of  the  tax  onto  consumers.  

5. A  fall  in  the  exchange  rate  –  this  can  cause  cost  push  inflation  because  it  leads  to  an  increase  in  the  
prices  of  imported  products  such  as  essential  raw  materials,  components  and  finished  products  

6. Monopoly  employers/profit-­‐push  inflation  –  where  dominants  firms  in  a  market  use  their  market  
power  (at  whatever  level  of  demand)  to  increase  prices  well  above  costs  
 
Cost-­‐push  inflation  such  as  that  caused  by  a  large  and  persistent  rise  in  the  world  price  of  crude  oil  can  be  
shown  in  a  diagram  by  an  inward  shift  of  the  short  run  aggregate  supply  curve.  The  fall  in  SRAS  leads  to  a  
contraction  of  national  output  together  with  a  rise  in  the  level  of  prices.    
 

 
 
Inflation  Expectations  
• Once  inflation  becomes  established  in  an  economy  it  can  be  difficult  to  remove.    
• Most  agents  in  the  economy  (e.g.  workers,  businesses  and  lenders)  will  raise  their  inflation  
expectations  and  build  it  into  their  calculations  and  decisions  
• A  rise  in  inflation  can  lead  to  an  increase  in  inflation  expectations.  This  can  then  feed  through  to  
higher  wage  claims  and  rising  costs  
 
   

Page  78     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Internal  causes  of  inflation  
 

A  large  surge  in  property   Higher  wages  /  labour   Boom  in  credit  /  money   Rise  in  business  taxes  
prices   costs   supply   e.g.  VAT  

 
External  causes  of  inflation  
 

Increase  in  world  oil  /   Inflaton  in  global     Depreciaton  of  the   High  inflaton  in  other  
gas  prices   commodity  prices   exchange  rate   countries  

Countries  with  Highest  Inflation  in  2015  


The  chart  below  shows  actual  consumer  price  inflation  in  March  2015  drawing  on  data  from  the  IMF    
 

Inflaton  rate  (per  cent)  compared  to  previous  year  (March  2015)  
0.0%   20.0%   40.0%   60.0%   80.0%   100.0%   120.0%  

Venezuela   96.8%  
Ukraine   33.48%  
South  Sudan   28.98%  
Belarus   22.08%  
Sudan   19.03%  
Argentna   18.65%  
Russia   17.94%  
Malawi   17.31%  
Islamic  Republic  of  Iran   16.5%  
Sierra  Leone   13.07%  
Tajikistan   12.85%  
Eritrea   12.26%  
Ghana   12.2%  
Kyrgyz  Republic   10.75%  
Egypt   10.26%  
 
 
Page  79     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
The  Consequences  of  Inflation  For  Consumers,  Businesses,  the  Government  and  Workers  
Many  government  s  have  a  target  for  a  low  but  positive  rate  of  inflation.  They  believe  that  persistently  
high  inflation  can  have  damaging  economic  and  social  consequences.  
1. Income  redistribution:    
o One  risk  of  higher  inflation  is  that  it  has  a  regressive  effect  on  lower-­‐income  families  and  
older  people  in  society.  This  happen  when  prices  for  food  and  domestic  utilities  such  as  
water  and  heating  rise  at  a  rapid  rate.      
2. Falling  real  incomes:    
o If  people’s  pay  does  not  keep  pace  with  rising  prices,  then  real  incomes  will  fall    
3. Negative  real  interest  rates:    
o If  nominal  interest  rates  on  savings  accounts  are  lower  than  inflation,  people  who  rely  on  
interest  from  their  savings  will  be  poorer.    
o Real  interest  rates  for  millions  of  savers  have  been  negative  for  many  years  since  the  global  
financial  crisis  
4. Cost  of  borrowing:    
o High  inflation  may  also  eventually  lead  to  higher  interest  rates  for  businesses  and  people  
needing  loans  and  mortgages  as  financial  markets  protect  themselves  against  rising  prices  
and  increase  the  cost  of  borrowing  on  short  and  longer-­‐term  debt.    
o There  is  also  pressure  on  the  government  to  increase  the  value  of  the  state  pension  and  
unemployment  benefits  and  other  welfare  payments  as  the  cost  of  living  climbs  higher.  
5. Risks  of  wage  inflation:    
o High  inflation  can  cause  an  increase  in  wage  claims  as  people  protect  their  real  incomes.    
o This  can  lead  to  a  rise  in  unit  labour  costs  and  lower  profits  for  businesses  
6. Business  competitiveness:    
o If  one  country  has  a  much  higher  rate  of  inflation  than  others,  this  will  make  its  exports  less  
price  competitive  in  world  markets.  Eventually  this  may  show  through  in  reduced  export  
orders,  lower  profits  and  fewer  jobs,  and  also  in  a  worsening  of  a  country’s  trade  balance.    
o A  fall  in  exports  can  trigger  negative  multiplier  effects  on  national  income  and  employment.  
7. Business  uncertainty:    
o High  and  volatile  inflation  is  not  good  for  business  confidence  because  they  cannot  be  sure  
of  what  their  costs  are  likely  to  be.  This  uncertainty  might  lead  to  less  investment  spending.    
Possible  Winners  and  Losers  from  High  Inflation  
One  of  the  effects  of  inflation  is  that  it  can  lead  to  arbitrary  changes  in  the  distribution  of  real  incomes  and  
wealth  in  a  country.  
 

Winners   Losers  
• Workers  with  strong  wage  bargaining  power   • Retred  on  fixed  incomes  
• Debtors  if  real  interest  rates  are  negatve   • Lenders  if  real  interest  rates  are  negatve  
• Producers  if  prices  rise  faster  than  costs   • Savers  if  real  returns  are  negatve  
• Workers  in  low  paid  jobs  

 
 
Page  80     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
Why  is  the  rate  of  inflation  difficult  to  forecast  accurately?  
• The  rate  of  inflation  is  one  of  the  most  important  macroeconomic  indicators  that  we  study  in  
macroeconomics.  Data  on  prices  is  published  regularly  and  given  lots  of  attention  by  the  media  and  
the  financial  markets.    
• Many  agents  would  like  to  have  accurate  forecasts  of  what  is  likely  to  happen  to  prices  in  the  future  
because  they  affect  spending,  saving  and  investment  decisions.  

• The  chart  shows  the  UK  CPI  inflation  forecast  published  by  the  Bank  of  England.  The  probability  fan  
chart  for  inflation  indicates  the  range  of  probabilities  for  inflation  in  the  forecast  period.    
 

 
 
Some  reasons  for  difficulties  in  forecasting  inflation  

Volatle  global  
energy  prices  

Government  
indirect  taxes  can   Changes  in  value  
of  the  currency  
change  

Uncertain  growth  
Volatle  food   of  aggregate  
prices  
demand  

 
 
 
Page  81     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
Controlling  Inflation  –  Macroeconomic  Policies  
 
Inflation  can  be  reduced  by  policies  that  (i)  slow  down  the  growth  of  AD  or  (ii)  boost  the  rate  of  growth  of  
aggregate  supply  (AS)  

1.  Fiscal  policy:    

a. Controlling  aggregate  demand  is  important  if  inflation  is  to  be  controlled.  If  the  
government  believes  that  AD  is  too  high,  it  may  choose  to  ‘tighten  fiscal  policy’  by  reducing  
its  own  spending  on  public  and  merit  goods  or  welfare  payments  

b. It  can  choose  to  raise  direct  taxes,  leading  to  a  reduction  in  real  disposable  income  

c. The  consequence  may  be  that  demand  and  output  are  lower  which  has  a  negative  effect  on  
jobs  and  real  economic  growth  in  the  short-­‐term  

2. Monetary  policy:    

a. A  ‘tightening  of  monetary  policy’  involves  the  central  bank  introducing  a  period  of  higher  
interest  rates  to  reduce  consumer  and  investment  spending  

b. Higher  interest  rates  may  cause  the  exchange  rate  to  appreciate  in  value  bringing  about  a  
fall  in  the  cost  of  imported  goods  and  services  and  also  a  fall  in  demand  for  exports  (X)  

3. Supply  side  economic  policies:    

a. Supply  side  policies  seek  to  increase  productivity,  competition  and  innovation  –  all  of  
which  maintain  lower  prices.  These  are  ways  of  controlling  inflation  in  the  medium  term  

i. A  reduction  in  company  taxes  to  encourage  greater  investment  

ii. A  reduction  in  taxes  which  increases  risk-­‐taking  and  incentives  to  work  –  a  cut  in  
income  taxes  can  be  considered  both  a  fiscal  and  a  supply-­‐side  policy  

iii. Policies  to  open  a  market  to  more  competition  to  increase  supply  and  lower  prices  

b. Rising  productivity  will  cause  an  outward  shift  of  aggregate  supply  

4. Direct  controls  -­‐  a  government  might  choose  to  introduce  direct  controls  on  some  prices  and  wages  

a. Public  sector  pay  awards  –  the  annual  increase  in  government  sector  pay  might  be  tightly  
controlled  or  even  froze  (this  means  a  real  wage  decrease).  

b. The  prices  of  some  utilities  such  as  water  bills  are  subject  to  regulatory  control  –  if  the  price  
capping  regime  changes,  this  can  have  a  short-­‐term  effect  on  the  rate  of  inflation  
 
Evaluation  –  how  best  can  inflation  be  controlled?  
1. The  best  way  to  control  inflation  in  the  short  term  is  for  the  government  and  the  central  bank  to  
keep  control  of  aggregate  demand  to  a  level  consistent  with  our  productive  capacity  
2. Controlling  demand  to  limit  inflation  is  likely  to  be  ineffective  in  the  short  run  if  the  main  causes  are  
due  to  external  shocks  such  as  high  world  food  and  energy  prices  
3. The  UK  is  an  open  economy  in  which  inflation  is  strongly  affected  by  events  in  the  rest  of  the  world  
4. In  the  long  run,  it  is  the  growth  of  a  country’s  supply-­‐side  productive  potential  that  gives  an  
economy  the  flexibility  to  grow  without  suffering  from  acceleration  in  cost  and  price  inflation.  
Page  82     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
 

17.Deflation  
What  is  deflation?  
• Deflation  is  a  persistent  fall  in  a  country’s  general  price  level.    
• A  number  of  countries  were  experiencing  negative  inflation  rates  in  May  2015  among  them  a  
growing  cluster  of  countries  inside  the  European  Union.  
Countries  with  the  lowest  inflation  rate  in  2015    
 
Inflaton  rate  compared  to  previous  year  
-­‐1.8%   -­‐1.6%   -­‐1.4%   -­‐1.2%   -­‐1.0%   -­‐0.8%   -­‐0.6%   -­‐0.4%   -­‐0.2%   0.0%  
Grenada   -­‐1.55%  
Switzerland   -­‐1.19%  
Zimbabwe   -­‐1.05%  
Bulgaria   -­‐1.03%  
Micronesia   -­‐1%  
Cyprus   -­‐1%  
Croata   -­‐0.89%  
Poland   -­‐0.83%  
El  Salvador   -­‐0.8%  
Dominica   -­‐0.77%  
Spain   -­‐0.73%  
Marshall  Islands   -­‐0.59%  
Slovenia   -­‐0.39%  
Lithuania   -­‐0.31%  
Camboadia   -­‐0.31%  

 
 
Main  causes  of  deflation  
Deflation  can  come  from  demand  and  supply-­‐side  causes  
 

Demand-­‐side  causes  of  deflakon  

• Deep  fall  in  AD  causing  a  persistent  recession  /  depression    


• Large  negatve  output  gap  –  i.e.  high  level  of  spare  capacity  

Supply-­‐side  causes  of  deflakon  

• Improved  productvity  
• Technological  advances  
• Significant  fall  in  wage  rates  
• High  exchange  rate  causing  import  prices  to  fall  
 
 
 

Page  83     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
 

 
 
 
Evaluating  the  Consequences  of  Price  Deflation  
1. Holding  back  on  spending:  Consumers  may  postpone  demand  if  they  expect  prices  to  fall  in  the  
future  
2. Debts  increase:  The  real  value  of  debt  rises  with  deflation  and  higher  real  debts  can  be  a  big  drag  
on  consumer  confidence  
3. The  real  cost  of  borrowing  increases:  Real  interest  rates  will  rise  if  nominal  rates  of  interest  do  not  
fall  in  line  with  prices.  
4. Lower  profit  margins:  Lower  prices  can  mean  reduced  revenues  &  profits  for  businesses  -­‐  this  can  
then  lead  to  higher  unemployment  as  firms  seek  to  reduce  costs  by  shedding  labour.  
5. Confidence  and  saving:  Falling  asset  prices  such  as  price  deflation  in  the  housing  market  hits  
personal  sector  wealth  and  confidence  
6. Income  distribution:  Deflation  leads  to  a  redistribution  of  income  from  debtors  to  creditors  –  but  
debtors  may  default  on  loans  
7. Deflation  can  make  exporters  more  competitive  eventually  –  but  this  often  comes  at  a  cost  i.e.  
higher  unemployment  in  short  term  

Page  84     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Real  interest  rates  rise   Real  level  of  debt  rises   Pressure  for  lower  wages  

Declining  business  profits   Rise  in  cyclical  unemployment   Improved  price  


compettveness  

 
 
Economic  Policies  to  Avoid  Price  Deflation  
 
The  main  approach  to  avoiding  deflation  is  to  use  macro-­‐stimulus  policies  either  by  loosening  monetary  
policy  (i.e.  cutting  interest  rates)  and/or  fiscal  policy  (to  increase  domestic  demand  for  goods  and  services)  
 
Low  interest  rates  and  quanktakve  easing  
•   In  some  countries,  policy  interest  rates  have  become  negatve  e.g.  Switzerland  
•   Cheaper  loans  for  businesses  and  households  
•   Expanding  the  supply  of  credit  in  banking  system  
•   QE  used  by  many  central  banks  including  BoE  and  European  Bank  

Fiscal  skmulus  measures  


•   Higher  government  spending  (e.g.  capital  projects)  
•   A  rise  in  government  borrowing  to  inject  demand  into  the  circular  flow  
•   Lower  direct  taxes  to  increase  disposable  income  and  spending  

Other  measures  to  skmulate  aggregate  demand  


•   Awempts  to  lower  the  value  of  the  exchange  rate  (perhaps  via  central  bank  
interventon  to  sell  their  currency  in  the  market)  
•   Higher  taxes  on  savings  to  encourage  consumpton  

 
Page  85     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
18.Employment  and  Unemployment    
 
Definition  of  unemployment  
• The  unemployed  are  those  people  able,  available  and  willing  to  work  at  the  going  wage  but  cannot  
find  a  job  despite  an  active  search  for  work  
• Unemployment  means  that  scarce  human  resources  are  not  being  used  to  produce  goods  and  
services  to  meet  people’s  needs  and  wants  
Measuring  Employment  and  Unemployment  –  Some  Key  Terms  
 
The  number  of  people  officially  claiming  unemployment-­‐related  
Claimant  Count  (JSA)  
benefits  –  must  be  actively  seeking  work  
All  those  actively  seeking  and  available  for  work,  whether  or  not  they  
Labour  Force  Survey  (LFS)  
are  claiming  benefit  

Long-­‐Term  unemployed   People  unemployed  for  at  least  one  year  

The  number  of  people  of  working  age  who  are  able,  available  and  
Labour  force  
willing  to  work  
When  there  enough  unfilled  job  vacancies  for  all  the  unemployed  to  
Full  employment  
take  work  
People  out  of  work  for  a  long  time  who  may  give  up  on  job  search  and  
Discouraged  workers  
effectively  leave  the  labour  market  
Those  who  are  of  working  age  but  are  neither  in  work  nor  actively  
Economically  inactive  
seeking  paid  work  
The  percentage  of  the  population  of  working  age  in  full-­‐time  or  part-­‐
Employment  rate  
time  paid  work  
Percentage  of  the  economically  active  population  who  are  
Unemployment  rate  
unemployed  
 
Summary  of  Key  UK  Labour  Market  Data  in  Recent  Years  
 
Labour  Force   Labour  Force  
Survey   Survey  
Year   Total  Employment   Employment  Rate  
Unemployment   Unemployment  
Level   Rate  
Per  cent  of  
Per  cent  of  the  
Thousands   Thousands   population  of  
  labour  force  
working  age  
2011   2,593   8.1   29,376   70.3  
2012   2,572   8.0   29,696   71.0  
2013   2,476   7.6   30,043   71.5  
2014   2,027   6.2   30,726   72.9  
2015  (April)   1,813   5.5   31,053   73.4  
 
 

Page  86     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
The  Employment  Rate  
The  employment  rate  is  measured  as  the  percentage  of  the  population  of  working  age  in  full-­‐time  or  part-­‐
time  paid  work.  The  employment  rate  fell  sharply  during  the  last  recession  but  since  2012  it  has  recovered  
strongly  and  it  now  at  its  highest  level  for  over  twenty  years.  Nearly  75%  of  the  population  of  working  age  
have  a  job.  
 
74.0%  
73.5%  
73.3%  
73.5%  
72.9%   72.8%  
73.0%   72.7%   72.6%  
72.5%  
Employment  rate  

72.5%  

72.0%  

71.5%   71.1%  

71.0%  
70.5%  
70.5%  

70.0%  

 
 
Unemployment  in  the  UK  Economy  over  Long  Run  
The  unemployment  rate  has  varied  over  the  last  40  years.  Our  chart  shows  the  peaks  over  this  period  –  the  
peak  rate  has  been  falling.  After  the  last  recession,  unemployment  using  the  LFS  measure  peaked  at  8.5%  of  
the  labour  force  and  has  fallen  steadily  since,  nudging  towards  an  unemployment  rate  of  just  5%  by  the  
summer  of  2015.  

14
11.9
12 10.7

10
8.5

6 6.9
5.5
4 4.7

-2 18 month change

-4
1973 1977 1981 1985 1989 1993 1997 2001 2005 2009 2013  

Page  87     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Economic  Inactivity  in  the  Labour  Market  
• Economically  active  people  are  those  in  work  plus  those  seeking  and  available  to  work.  
Economically  inactive  people  are  those  who  have  stopped  an  active  search  for  paid  work  in  the  
labour  market.  
• Between  Mar-­‐May  2015,  the  total  of  economically  inactive  aged  16-­‐64  (thousands)  in  the  UK  was  
measured  at  just  over  9  million  
Distinction  between  Unemployment  and  Under-­‐Employment  
• Under-­‐employment  occurs  when  people  are  counted  as:  
o Looking  for  an  additional  job  or  actively  searching  for  a  new  job  with  longer  hours  to  
replace  their  current  (main)  job  
o They  want  to  work  longer  hours  in  their  current  job  (at  their  basic  rate  of  pay).  
• Under-­‐employment  can  be  rising  even  though  unemployment  is  declining  
Estimated  under-­‐employment  in  the  UK  economy  2002-­‐2015  
The  chart  below  shows  the  number  of  people  (in  thousands)  estimated  to  be  under-­‐employed.  
 

3,300  

3,100  

2,900  

2,700  

2,500  

2,300  

2,100  

1,900  

1,700  

1,500  
2002   2003   2004   2005   2006   2007   2008   2009   2010   2011   2012   2013   2014   2015  
 
 
Main  Types  and  Causes  of  Unemployment  
 
Frictional  Unemployment  
• Frictional  unemployment  is  transitional  unemployment  as  people  move  between  jobs  
• For  example,  newly-­‐redundant  workers  who  have  been  laid  off  by  their  previous  employer,  or  
people  joining  the  labour  market  for  the  first  time  such  as  university  graduates  or  school  leavers  
who  may  take  time  searching  to  find  work  they  want  at  wage  rates  they  are  prepared  to  accept.      
• Imperfect  information  makes  unemployment  worse  if  people  are  unaware  of  available  jobs.    
• Incentives  problems  can  also  cause  frictional  unemployment  as  some  people  may  stay  out  of  work  
if  they  believe  the  tax  and  benefit  system  leaves  them  little  or  no  better  off  from  taking  a  job  
• When  there  are  disincentives  for  people  to  accept  work,  this  is  known  as  the  unemployment  trap.    
• Frictional  unemployment  happens  when  it  takes  time  for  a  country’s  labour  market  to  match  the  
available  jobs  with  people  seeking  work.    
Page  88     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
Structural  Unemployment  
• Structural  unemployment  happens  when  there  is  a  long-­‐term  decline  in  demand  in  an  industry  
leading  to  fewer  jobs  as  demand  for  labour  falls  away.    
• Examples  might  include:  
o Jobs  being  replaced  by  new  technology  e.g.  online  banking  and  online  retailing  
o Unemployment  caused  by  foreign  competition  (or  changes  in  comparative  advantage)  
• Structural  unemployment  exists  where  there  is  a  mismatch  between  their  skills  and  the  
requirements  of  new  job  opportunities.  This  is  due  to  occupational  and  geographical  immobility  of  
labour  and  requires  investment  to  improve  skills,  give  the  unemployed  suitable  and  effective  
training  and  work  experience  and  make  them  able  to  move  location  if  needed  to  take  a  new  job.  
• Globalisation  leads  to  changes  in  the  patterns  of  trade  between  countries.  Many  of  workers  may  
suffer  from  a  period  of  structural  unemployment,  particularly  if  they  are  in  regions  of  above-­‐
average  unemployment  rates  where  job  opportunities  are  scarce.    
Underlying  causes  of  structural  unemployment  

Decline  of  manufacturing   Occupatonal  immobility   Geographical  immobility   Robotcs  replacing  jobs  

Foreign  competton  –   Long  term  regional   Disincentves  e.g.   Outsourcing  of  


rising  imports   decline   Poverty  Trap   producton  overseas  

 
Cyclical  Unemployment:      
• Cyclical  unemployment  is  involuntary  unemployment  due  to  a  lack  of  demand  for  goods  and  
services.  This  is  also  known  as  Keynesian  unemployment  or  demand-­‐deficient  unemployment  
• When  there  is  a  recession  or  a  slowdown  in  growth,  we  see  a  rising  unemployment  because  of  
plant  closures,  business  failures  causing  worker  lay-­‐offs  and  redundancies.    
• The  economy  does  not  have  to  go  into  recession  for  cyclical  unemployment  to  start  rising.  Many  
jobs  can  be  lost  even  in  a  slowdown  phase  and  one  reason  for  this  is  because  of  rising  productivity.    
• Cyclical  unemployment  is  most  likely  to  occur  when  there  is  a  negative  output  gap  
Technological  Unemployment  
• The  term  “technological  unemployment”  was  first  coined  in  the  1930s  by  John  Maynard  Keynes  to  
describe  the  way  in  which  productivity-­‐enhancing  innovation  displaces  workers  and  creates  periods  
of  higher  unemployment.  It  is  linked  to  structural  unemployment.    

Page  89     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
• Some  link  the  rise  of  the  internet  as  a  cause  of  technological  unemployment  for  example  the  US  
business  Kodak  went  bust  in  2013  with  its  140,000  employees,  in  part  the  result  of  the  rapid  
expansion  of  Instagram,  which,  when  it  was  sold  to  Facebook  employed  just  13  people  
• Over  the  long  term  is  that  innovation  and  the  emergence  and  uptake  of  new  technologies  creates  
more  jobs  than  it  destroys.  
• Those  most  at  risk  from  the  creative  destruction  of  new  technologies  are  those  with  low  and  out-­‐
dated  skills  in  the  labour  market.  

 
 
Long  Term  Unemployment  
• Long-­‐term  unemployment  affects  people  who  have  been  out  of  paid  work  for  at  least  one  year  
• The  longer  the  duration  of  unemployment,  the  harder  for  people  to  get  a  job.  Skills  decline,  
motivation  to  look  for  work  suffers  and  employers  are  less  likely  offer  work  to  a  long-­‐term  
unemployed  person  
• The  chart  below  shows  the  duration  of  unemployment  for  people  in  the  UK  from  2013  to  2015    

Page  90     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Up  to  6  months   Over  6  and  up  to  12  months   Over  12  months  

1400  
Number  of  unemployed  people  in  thousands  

1,168  
1200   1,104  
1,046  
999   971  
950   923   955  
1000   894  
848   816  
800   741  
688  
638  
588   575  
600  
427   396  
350   333   321  
400   300   284   305  

200  

0  
Jul-­‐Sep  2013   Oct-­‐Dec   Jan-­‐Mar   Apr-­‐Jun   Jul-­‐Sep  2014   Oct-­‐Dec   Jan-­‐Mar   Apr-­‐Jun  
2013   2014   2014   2014   2015   2015  
 
 
Highest  Unemployment  Rates  among  EU  Countries  
 
Greece  and  Spain  have  the  highest  rates  of  adult  unemployment  in  the  EU.  Youth  unemployment  greatly  
exceeds  the  average  adult  rate  with  over  half  of  young  workers  in  Greece  and  Spain  out  of  work.  
 

Unemployment  rate  as  %  of  the  labour  force  


0.0%   5.0%   10.0%   15.0%   20.0%   25.0%   30.0%  
Greece**   25.6%  
Spain   22.5%  
Cyprus   16%  
Croata   15.8%  
Portugal   13.2%  
Italy   12.4%  
Slovakia   11.8%  
Euro  area   11.1%  
France   10.3%  
Latvia**   9.9%  
Ireland   9.8%  
Bulgaria   9.7%  
European  Union   9.6%  
Finland   9.4%  
Slovenia   9.2%  
 
 
   

Page  91     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
20  Countries  with  the  Highest  Unemployment  Rate  
Staggeringly  high  rates  of  “official”  unemployment  can  happen  when  an  economy  collapses  e.g.  Zimbabwe  
in  2009  and  in  the  fallout  from  conflict    
 

Unemployment  rate  as  a  %  of  the  labour  force  


0.0%   10.0%   20.0%   30.0%   40.0%   50.0%   60.0%   70.0%   80.0%   90.0%   100.0%  
Zimbabwe  (2009)   95%  
Nauru  (2004)   90%  
Liberia  (2003)   85%  
Burkina  Faso  (2004)   77%  
Turkmenistan  (2004)   60%  
Cocos  Islands  (2000)   60%  
Djibout  (2007)   59%  
Republic  of  Congo  (2012)   53%  
Namibia  (2008)   51.2%  
Senegal  (2007)   48%  
Nepal  (2008)   46%  
Kosovo  (2011)   45.3%  
Bosnia  and  Herzegovina  (2012)   44.1%  
Hait  (2010)   40.6%  
Swaziland  (2006)   40%  
 
 
The  Effects  of  Unemployment  on  consumers,  businesses,  workers,  government  and  society  
• High  unemployment  creates  costs  for  individuals,  for  communities  and  for  the  economy  as  a  whole.    
• Some  of  these  costs  are  difficult  to  value  and  measure,  especially  the  social  /  human  costs.  
1. Loss  of  income:  Unemployment  nearly  always  results  in  a  loss  of  disposable  income,  and  majority  
of  the  unemployed  suffer  a  decline  in  their  living  standards  and  are  worse  off  out  of  work.    
2. Risk  of  deflation:  High  unemployment  brings  about  a  lower  level  of  aggregate  demand  and  can  lead  
to  deflationary  pressures  due  to  high  levels  of  spare  capacity.    
3. Negative  multiplier  effects:  The  closure  of  a  local  factory  with  the  loss  of  hundreds  of  jobs  can  have  
a  large  negative  multiplier  effect  on  the  local  and  regional  economy.    
a. There  is  a  loss  of  potential  national  output  and  is  a  waste  of  scarce  resources  
b. If  some  people  leave  the  labour  market  permanently  because  they  have  lost  the  motivation  
to  search  for  work,  this  can  have  a  negative  effect  on  long-­‐  run  aggregate  supply  and  
damage  the  economy’s  growth  potential.  This  is  called  a  “hysteresis  effect”.  
4. Fiscal  costs:    
a. The  government  loses  out  because  of  a  fall  in  tax  revenues  and  higher  spending  on  
welfare  payments  for  families  with  people  out  of  work  
b. The  result  can  be  an  increase  in  the  budget  deficit  that  then  increases  the  risk  that  the  
government  will  have  to  raise  taxation  or  cut  public  spending  on  public  and  merit  goods.  
5. Social  costs  including  growing  poverty:    
a. Rising  unemployment  is  linked  to  social  deprivation  and  social  dislocation  including  
increased  divorce  rates,  worsening  health  and  lower  life  expectancy  

Page  92     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
b. Regions  that  suffer  from  persistently  high  unemployment  see  falling  real  incomes  and  a  
widening  of  inequality  of  income  and  wealth.    
6. Outward  migration  (emigration)  
a. When  unemployment  is  persistently  high  and  employment  rates  are  falling,  many  people  
may  move  country  in  search  of  work  leading  to  a  decline  in  the  active  labour  supply  
Long-­‐term  unemployment  
• The  economic  and  social  costs  of  unemployment  depend  on  (i)  how  many  people  are  out  of  work  
and  how  productive  they  might  have  been  (ii)  the  length  of  time  they  remain  jobless.    
• In  the  UK  nearly  40  per  cent  of  people  of  the  unemployed  have  been  without  a  job  for  at  least  a  
year.  
Youth  Unemployment  
• 740,000  people  aged  16-­‐24  were  unemployed  in  December  2014.  
• The  youth  unemployment  rate  was  at  15%    
• High  rates  of  youth  unemployment  have  serious  economic  and  social  consequences  
• Young  people  out  of  work  risk  a  permanent  fall  in  their  expected  lifetime  earnings  from  work  
NEETS  
• Young  people  not  in  education,  employment  or  training  (NEET)  
• NEETS  are  effectively  outsiders  in  the  labour  market  and  this  group  has  become  a  key  area  for  
policy  intervention  e.g.  via  apprenticeship  schemes  
Some  of  the  main  causes  of  high  youth  unemployment  are  shown  below  
 

Skills  Gaps  -­‐  Employers  


may  not  be  willing  to   Reluctant  Employers  –  
employ  people  who  lack   they  may  prefer  older,  
the  ability  to  read  and   more  experienced  workers  
write  

Falling  Rekrement  Rates   Weak  Macro  


caused  by  declining   Fundamentals  –  i.e.  low  
pension  incomes  =  fewer   real  GDP  growth  and  low  
jobs  for  younger  people   business  confidence  

 
   

Page  93     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Youth  Unemployment  Rate  in  the  UK  
 
25.0%  

20.0%   19%   19.3%  18.8%  


17.9%  
Unemployment  rate  in  percent  

17.3%  

15%  
15.0%   13.3%  
12.2%  12.2%  
10.6%  10.4%  10.4%  10.6%  10.4%   11%  
10.0%  

5.0%  

0.0%  
2000   2001   2002   2003   2004   2005   2006   2007   2008   2009   2010   2011   2012   2013   2014  
 
 
NEETS  in  the  UK  Labour  Market  
 
Young  people  not  in  education,  employment  or  training  in  UK  from  Jan-­‐March  2013  to  Jan-­‐March  2015  
 
1200  
1,093   1,092   1,096  
1,041  
987   966   963  
1000   954   943  

800  
NEET  in  thousands  

600  

400  

200  

0  
Jan-­‐Mar   Apr-­‐Jun   Jul-­‐Sep   Oct-­‐Dec   Jan-­‐Mar   Apr-­‐Jun   Jul-­‐Sep   Oct-­‐Dec   Jan-­‐Mar  
2013   2013   2013   2013   2014   2014   2014   2014   2015  
 
 
 
   

Page  94     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Which  Economic  Policies  can  be  used  to  Reduce  Unemployment?  
 
Distinction  can  be  made  between  demand-­‐side  and  supply-­‐side  policies  to  improve  the  working  of  the  
labour  market  in  matching  people  to  available  jobs  
Reducing  occupational  immobility:    

• Immobility  is  a  cause  of  structural  unemployment.    


• Policies  such  as  apprenticeship  schemes  aim  to  provide  the  unemployed  with  the  new  skills  they  
need  to  find  fresh  employment  and  to  improve  the  incentives  to  find  work.    
• In  2013,  over  500,000  people  started  apprenticeships  in  the  UK.  For  many  years  the  poor  quality  of  
work-­‐place  training  has  been  a  concern,  with  evidence  of  a  persistent  skills-­‐gap  in  the  UK.    
• In  a  report  published  in  2011,  a  trade  union  reported  that  11%  of  British  adults  do  not  have  any  
qualifications.  In  some  areas  such  as  parts  of  Glasgow  and  Birmingham,  more  than  a  third  of  people  
of  working  age  have  no  qualifications.  

Reducing  the  geographical  immobility  of  labour:    

• Many  people  have  the  right  skills  to  find  fresh  work  but  factors  such  as  high  house  prices  and  
housing  rents,  family  and  social  ties  and  regional  differences  in  the  cost  of  living  make  it  difficult  
and  sometimes  impossible  to  change  location  in  order  to  get  a  new  job.    
• Many  economists  point  to  a  persistently  low  level  of  new  house  building  as  a  major  factor  impeding  
labour  mobility  and  the  chances  finding  new  work.  

Benefit  and  tax  reforms:    

• To  some  economists,  a  policy  that  reduces  the  real  value  of  welfare  benefits  might  increase  the  
incentive  for  the  unemployed  to  take  a  job.    
• It  is  rare  that  the  root  cause  of  someone  being  out  work  is  the  prospect  of  state  welfare  handouts.    
• Targeted  measures  to  improve  people’s  incentives  might  include  linking  welfare  benefits  to  
participation  in  work  experience  programmes  or  lower  marginal  tax  rates  for  people  on  low  
incomes.  

Increasing  aggregate  demand:    

• A  Keynesian-­‐style  stimulus  is  an  active  policy  during  a  recession.    


• This  might  include  increases  in  state  investment  spending  or  lower  taxes  to  boost  disposable  
income  
• Some  economists  recommend  schemes  to  create  more  ‘shovel-­‐ready’  jobs,  typically  involving  
construction  projects  that  are  labour  intensive  
• The  hope  is  that  extra  spending  on  new  roads,  housing  and  other  infrastructure  projects  will  lead  to  
a  strong  positive  multiplier  effect  on  output,  incomes  and  jobs.  

Employment  subsidies  and/or  employment  tax  cuts  (demand-­‐side  policy):    

• Government  subsidies  for  businesses  that  take  on  the  long-­‐term  unemployed  –  for  example,  as  
part  of  the  UK  Youth  Contract,  payments  of  up  to  £2,275  are  available  to  employers  who  take  on  
young  people  (aged  18-­‐24)  who  have  been  claiming  JSA  for  more  than  six  months  
• Lower  taxes  on  businesses  that  employ  more  workers  might  be  effective,  for  example  cuts  in  
employer  national  insurance  contributions  for  young,  low-­‐paid  workers  

Changing  the  participation  age  


Page  95     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
• From  2013,  young  people  in  the  UK  will  be  required  to  continue  in  education  or  training  until  they  
turn  17  and  from  2015  they  will  be  required  to  continue  in  education  or  training  until  they  turn  18.  

Summary  of  economic  policies  to  improve  mobility  and  incentives  


 
Reducing  occupatonal  mobility  
• Bewer  funding  for  and  more  effectve  workplace  training  
• Teaching  new  skills  e.g.  Coding  for  gaming,  languages  
• An  expansion  of  apprentceship  /  internship  programmes  

Improving  geographical  mobility  


• Rise  in  house-­‐building  will  help  to  keep  property  prices  lower  and  encourage  more  
affordable  rents  
• Actve  regional  policy  to  create  new  jobs  and  businesses  

Stmulate  stronger  work  incentves  


• Higher  minimum  wage    or  a  living  wage    
• Reductons  in  income  tax  /  natonal  insurance  
• Welfare  reforms  to  reduce  the  risk  of  the  poverty  trap  

 
 
Evaluating  the  Benefits  of  Falling  Unemployment  
 

Standard  economic  and  social  benefits  of  falling  


Potential  disadvantages  of  falling  unemployment  
unemployment  

Increased  employment  –  boosts  real  GDP,  helps  to   Extra  spending  from  expanding  labour  market  might  
lift  living  standards,  demand   worsen  the  current  account  

More  people  in  work  –  creates  extra  tax  revenues  


Risk  of  an  acceleration  in  demand-­‐pull  and  cost-­‐push  
for  the  government  either  to  lower  the  deficit  /  
inflationary  pressures  if  unemployment  falls  rapidly  
increase  spending  (G)  

Social  costs  of  high  unemployment  are  severe  –   Fewer  spare  labour  will  mean  a  rise  in  unfilled  
progress  in  cutting  it  has  important  economic  +   vacancies;  labour  shortages  might  put  off  some  
social  benefits   inward  investment  

 
   

Page  96     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Housing  and  labour  immobility  
 
Average  House  Prices  by  Region   Average  Price  
 
(Price  Data  is  for  Q3,  2014)  
 
East  Anglia     £195K  
London   £401K  
North   £121K  
North  West   £146K  
South  East   £234K  
South  West   £210K  
Yorks  &  Humber   £145K  
Wales     £144K  
Scotland     £142K  
Northern  Ireland   £120K  
United  Kingdom  (average)   £188K  
 
• Big  differences  in  regional  house  prices  are  perhaps  the  biggest  single  cause  of  geographical  
immobility  in  the  UK  labour  market  
• Average  house  prices  in  London  are  more  than  twice  the  UK  average  
• The  high  cost  of  renting  in  major  towns  and  cities  is  also  a  barrier    
• Many  people  are  reluctant  to  move  to  areas  where  living  costs  are  higher  
• And  people  living  in  high-­‐price  areas  may  want  to  stay  and  gain  from  house  price  inflation  
• The  lack  of  affordable  housing  is  a  huge  issue  in  the  UK  economy  and  contributes  to  structural  
unemployment.  
• Most  economists  support  the  idea  of  a  programme  of  major  house-­‐building  to  stimulate  demand  
and  to  improve  housing  affordability  to  reduce  unemployment  
 Average  (mean)  private  weekly  rent  in  England  from  2008/2009  to  2013/2014    
 
200  
176  
180  
160   164   163  
153   156  
160  
Mean  weekly  rent  in  GBP  

140  

120  

100  

80  

60  

40  

20  

0  
2008/09   2009/10   2010/11   2011/12   2012/13   2013/14  

   
Page  97     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
19.Labour  Migration  and  Macroeconomic  Performance  in  the  UK  
   
Background  on  labour  migration  
• Labour  migration  has  become  an  increasingly  important  feature  of  our  globalizing  world  and  it  
raises  important  economic,  social  and  political  issues.    
• In  the  year  to  June  2013  -­‐  503,000  people  immigrated  to  the  UK  whilst  320,000  emigrants  left  the  
UK.  Net  migration  =  183,000  
•  Migration  has  an  economic  impact  on  sending  and  receiving  countries  
• Over  250-­‐million  people  are  now  estimated  to  live  in  countries  in  which  they  were  not  born  
• The  global  stock  of  international  migrants  grew  by  38  per  cent  from  1990  to  2010.  However,  
international  migrants  constitute  a  small  fraction  of  the  world  population,  just  3.1%  in  2010  
• Migration  is  overwhelmingly  from  less  developed  to  more  developed  countries  and  regions  but  we  
are  also  seeing  outward  migration  from  some  of  Europe’s  hardest-­‐hit  countries.  
Official  data  for  inward  and  outward  migration  is  shown  in  the  chart  below.  Net  migration  into  the  UK  has  
been  positive  in  recent  years.  
 
Migration  Data  for  the  UK  Economy  
700  

600  

500  

400  

300  

200  

100  

0  
YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE  
Jun   Dec   Jun   Dec   Jun   Dec   Jun   Dec   Jun   Dec   Mar   Jun   Sep   Dec   Mar   Jun   Sep   Dec   Mar   Jun   Sep   Dec   Mar   Jun   Sep   Dec   Mar   Jun   Sep   Dec  
05   05   06   06   07   07   08   08   09   09   10   10   10   10   11   11   11   11   12   12   12   12   13   13   13   13   14p   14p   14p   14p  

Rolling  year  (YE  =  Year  Ending,  p=provisional  data)   Revised  Net  Migraton  
 
 
The  impact  of  migration  on  the  UK  economy  
   
Economic  Benefits  of  Inward  Migration  
1. Migrants  provide  fresh  skills  and  higher  labour  productivity  
2. An  increase  in  the  size  of  the  active  labour  supply  –  boosting  potential  output  
3. A  driver  of  innovation  and  entrepreneurship    
4. Positive  multiplier  effects  if  migrants  find  paid  work    
5. Reducing  skilled-­‐labour  shortages  in  growing  industries  
6. Remittances  sent  home  by  migrants  add  to  the  gross  national  income  of  home  nations  –  creating  
potential  for  rising  exports  

Page  98     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
7. Tax  revenues:  Legal  immigrants  in  work  pay  direct  and  indirect  taxes  and  are  likely  to  be  net  
contributors  to  the  government’s  finances.  
Overall,  supporters  of  inward  labour  migration  argue  that  the  process  is  a  positive-­‐sum  game  rather  than  a  
zero-­‐sum  game.    
 

 
Arguments  against  large-­‐scale  inward  labour  migration  
1. Welfare  costs:  Increasing  cost  of  providing  public  services  
2. Possible  displacement  of  domestic  workers  
3. Social  tensions  arising  from  problems  of  integrating  thousands  of  extra  workers    
4. Rising  demand  for  housing  forces  up  property  prices  and  rents  for  many  groups  in  the  population  
5. Poverty  risk:  Migration  may  have  the  effect  of  worsening  the  level  of  relative  poverty  in  a  society.  
And  many  migrant  workers  have  complained  of  exploitation  by  businesses  that  have  monopsony  
power  in  a  local  labour  market.  
Brain  Drains  
• A  brain  drain  describes  the  movement  of  highly  skilled  or  professional  people  from  their  own  
country  to  another  country  where  they  can  earn  more  money  
• It  has  been  used  to  describe  net  outward  migration  of  people  from  several  European  Union  
countries  in  recent  times  (notably  Ireland,  Greece  and  Spain)  -­‐  another  phrase  for  this  is  human  
capital  flight.  
• One  disadvantage  is  that  countries  lose  out  on  the  benefits  that  might  have  accrued  from  the  
resources  used  in  educating  people  who  leave.  Add  to  this  the  loss  of  tax  revenue  from  those  who  
choose  to  live  and  work  overseas.    
• A  sizeable  loss  of  skilled  workers  (many  of  whom  may  be  younger  and  therefore  more  
geographically  mobile)  could  lead  to  labour  shortages  in  the  sender  country,  causing  rising  wages  
and  labour  costs.  
• Some  of  this  income  earned  overseas  returns  to  the  sender  country  in  the  form  of  remittances  
(adding  to  GNP)  and  many  skilled  migrants  often  leave  only  for  a  year  or  two  -­‐  the  percentage  of  
permanent  migration  inside  the  EU  is  relatively  small.  

Page  99     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Long  Term  Migration  into  UK  Economy  -­‐  Motivations  
 
300  
Work  related   Accompany  /  join   Formal  study  

250  

200  

150  

100  

50  

0  
YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE   YE  
Dec   Dec   Dec   Dec   Dec   Mar   Jun   Sep   Dec   Mar   Jun   Sep   Dec   Mar   Jun   Sep   Dec   Mar   Jun   Sep   Dec   Mar   Jun   Sep   Dec  
05   06   07   08   09   10   10   10   10   11   11   11   11   12   12   12   12   13   13   13   13   14p   14p   14p   14p  

Rolling  year  (YE  =  Year  Ending,  p  =  Year  includes  provisional  estmates  for  2014  onwards)  

 
 
Evaluating  the  effects  of  migration  
The  net  economc  benefits  and  costs  of  labour  migration  are  hard  to  quantify  and  estimate.    The  benefits  
and  costs  depend  in  part  on:  
1. The  types  of  people  who  choose  to  migrate  from  one  country  to  another.    
2. The  ease  with  which  they  assimilate  into  a  new  country  and  whether  they  find  regular  jobs.  
3. Whether  a  rise  in  labour  migration  stimulates  capital  spending  by  firms  and  by  government.  
4. Whether  workers  who  come  into  a  country  decide  to  stay  in  the  longer  term  or  whether  they  
regard  migration  as  essentially  a  temporary  exercise  (e.g.  to  gain  qualifications,  learn  some  English)  
before  moving  back  to  their  country  of  origin.  
 
Impact  on  the  economies  of  source  countries  
 
An  important  evaluation  point  is  that  inward  migration  into  the  UK  from  Eastern  European  countries  has  
affected  not  just  the  UK  labour  market  but  also  the  labour  markets  in  the  countries  from  which  these  
migrants  have  come.    Many  eastern  European  countries  have  suffered  from  a  sustained  reduction  in  the  
size  of  their  populations  –  migration  is  one  factor  behind  this  although  not  the  only  one.  There  are  many  
potential  negative  consequences  among  them  the  following:  
• A  reduction  in  the  size  of  the  available  labour  supply  
• A  possible  reduction  in  the  quality  of  the  labour  supply  if  skilled  migrants  leave  
• A  fall  in  aggregate  demand  for  goods  and  services  
• A  worsening  problem  of  labour  shortages  which  could  drive  up  wages,  costs  and  prices  
• A  decline  in  the  tax-­‐paying  population  which  will  hit  government  tax  revenues  
 

Page  100     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
20.Introduction  to  Globalisation  and  International  Trade  
What  is  globalisation?  
The  OECD  defines  globalization  as  
 
“The  geographic  dispersion  of  industrial  and  service  activities,  for  example  research  and  
development,  sourcing  of  inputs,  production  and  distribution,  and  the  cross-­‐border  networking  of  
companies,  for  example  through  joint  ventures  and  the  sharing  of  assets.”  
 
Globalisation  is  a  process  of  deeper  integration  between  countries  and  regions  of  the  world  involving:  
1. Greater  trade  in  goods  and  services  within  and  between  countries  and  regions  of  the  world  
2. An  increase  in  transfers  of  capital  including  the  expansion  of  foreign  direct  investment  (FDI)  by  
trans-­‐national  companies  (TNCs)  and  the  rising  influence  of  sovereign  wealth  funds  
3. The  development  of  global  brands  that  serve  markets  in  higher  and  lower  income  countries  
4. Spatial  division  of  labour–  for  example  out-­‐sourcing  and  off  shoring  of  production  and  support  
services  as  production  supply-­‐chains  has  become  more  international.  As  an  example,  the  iPhone  is  
part  of  a  complicated  global  supply  chain.  The  product  was  conceived  and  designed  in  Silicon  
Valley;  the  software  enhanced  by  software  engineers  working  in  India.  Most  iPhones  are  assembled  
/  manufactured  in  China  and  Taiwan  by  TNCs  such  as  FoxConn  
5. High  levels  of  labour  migration  within  and  between  countries  
6. New  nations  joining  the  trading  system.  Russia  joined  the  World  Trade  Organisation  in  July  2012  
7. A  fast  changing  shift  in  the  balance  of  economic  and  financial  power  from  developed  to  emerging  
economies  and  markets  –  i.e.  a  change  in  the  centre  of  gravity  in  the  world  economy  
8. Increasing  spending  on  investment,  innovation  and  infrastructure  across  large  parts  of  the  world  
9. Globalisation  is  a  process  of  making  the  world  economy  more  inter-­‐dependent  
10. Many  of  the  industrializing  countries  are  winning  a  rising  share  of  world  trade  and  their  economies  
are  growing  faster  than  in  richer  developed  nations  especially  after  the  global  financial  crisis  (GFC)  
Share  of  Global  GDP  (%,  at  market  exchange  rates)  
 
Country   2008   2012   2013   2015  

Brazil   3.1   3.2   3.1   2.9  


Mexico   2.1   2.0   2.0   2.0  
United  States   17.9   16.5   16.4   16.1  
China   12.0   15.2   15.8   17.0  
India   5.5   6.3   6.5   7.0  
South  Korea   1.6   1.7   1.7   1.6  
Germany   4.0   3.6   3.5   3.4  
Russia   3.8   3.5   3.4   3.1  
Spain   1.9   1.6   1.5   1.5  
United  Kingdom   2.7   2.4   2.4   2.4  
 
• The  British  economy  accounts  for  less  than  3  per  cent  of  world  output.    

Page  101     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
• China’s  share  has  grown  from  12%  in  2008  to  17%  in  2015  –  although  her  economy  is  now  slowing  
to  a  more  moderate  pace  of  growth.  Using  this  measure  of  GDP  at  market  exchange  rates,  China  is  
now  the  world’s  largest  economy,  over-­‐taking  the  United  States,  although  it  is  a  long  way  from  
being  the  richest.  China’s  per  capita  GDP  (PPP  adjusted)  remains  a  small  fraction  of  the  income  
levels  of  the  richest  advanced  countries.    
Key  Aspects  of  Globalisation  –  Our  Interconnected  World  
 

Trade  to  GDP  ratos  are  rising  for   Big  expansion  of  Financial  Capital   Rise  in  Foreign  Direct  Investment  
most  countries   Flows  between  countries   and  Cross  Border  M&A  

Rise  of  global  brands  –  including   Deeper  specializaton  of  labour  –   Global  supply  chains  &  new  trade  
many  from  emerging  countries   i.e.  components  from  many   and  investment  routes  
natons  
 
International  Trade  
• Trade  is  the  exchange  of  products  between  countries  
• When  conditions  are  right,  trade  brings  benefits  to  all  countries  involved  and  can  be  a  powerful  
driver  for  sustained  GDP  growth  and  rising  living  standards    
• One  way  of  expressing  the  gains  from  trade  in  goods  and  services  is  to  distinguish  between  static  
gains  (i.e.  improvements  in  allocative  and  productive  efficiency)  and  dynamic  gains  (i.e.  gains  in  
welfare  that  occur  from  improved  product  quality,  increased  choice  and  faster  innovative  
behaviour).  
The  concept  of  an  Open  Economy  
In  an  open  economy,  one  nation  trades  openly  with  other  
• Trade  in  goods  
• Trade  in  services  
• Free  flow  of  financial  capital    
• Free  flow  of  labour  resources  
An  open  economy  is  integrated  with  and  connected  to  the  world  economy  
 
 
Page  102     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
Gains  from  Trade  –  Understanding  Comparative  Advantage  
• First  introduced  by  David  Ricardo  in  1817,  comparative  advantage  exists  when  a  country  has  a  
‘margin  of  superiority’  in  the  supply  of  a  good  or  service  i.e.  where  the  marginal  cost  of  production  
is  lower  
• Countries  will  generally  specialise  in  and  export  products  which  use  intensively  the  factors  inputs  
which  they  are  most  abundantly  endowed  
• If  each  country  specializes,  total  output  can  be  increased  leading  to  better  allocative  efficiency  and  
welfare.  
• Because  production  costs  are  lower,  providing  that  a  good  price  can  be  found  from  buyers,  
specialisation  should  focus  on  goods  and  services  that  provide  the  best  value    
• In  many  countries,  comparative  advantage  is  shifting  towards  specialising  in  producing  and  
exporting  high-­‐value  and  high-­‐technology  manufactured  goods  and  high-­‐knowledge  services  
Example  of  Comparative  Advantage  
Usually  we  take  a  standard  two-­‐country  +  two-­‐product  example  to  illustrate  comparative  advantage.    
• Consider  two  countries  producing  digital  cameras  and  vacuum  cleaners  
• With  the  same  factor  resources  (inputs)  evenly  allocated  by  each  country  to  the  production  of  both  
goods,  the  production  possibilities  are  as  shown  in  the  table  below:  

OUTPUT  BEFORE  SPECIALISATION   DIGITAL  CAMERAS   VACUUM  CLEANERS  


UK   600   600  
United  States   2400   1000  
Total   3000   1600  
 
Stage  1:  Working  out  the  comparative  advantage  
o To  identify  who  should  specialise  in  a  particular  product,    consider  the  internal  opportunity  costs  
o Were  the  UK  to  shift  their  resources  into  supplying  more  vacuum  cleaners,  the  opportunity  cost  of  
each  vacuum  cleaner  is  one  digital  television  
o For  the  United  States  the  same  decision  has  an  opportunity  cost  of  2.4  digital  cameras.  Therefore,  
the  UK  has  a  comparative  advantage  in  vacuum  cleaners  
o If  the  UK  chose  to  reallocate  resources  to  digital  cameras  the  opportunity  cost  of  an  extra  camera  
is  one  vacuum  cleaner.  But  for  the  USA  the  opportunity  cost  is  only  5/12ths  of  a  vacuum  cleaner.    
o USA  has  comparative  advantage  in  producing  digital  cameras  because  its  opportunity  cost  is  lowest  
Stage  2:  Showing  the  Output  after  Specialisation  
 
OUTPUT  AFTER  SPECIALISATION   DIGITAL  CAMERAS   VACUUM  CLEANERS  
UK   0  (-­‐600)   1200  (+600)  
United  States   3360  (+960)   600  (-­‐400)  

Total   3360   1800  

o The  UK  specializes  totally  in  producing  vacuum  cleaners  –  doubling  its  output    -­‐  now1200    
o The  United  States  partly  specializes  in  digital  cameras  increasing  output  by  960  having  given  up  400  
units  of  vacuum  cleaners    
o As  a  result  of  specialisation  output  of  both  products  has  increased  -­‐  a  gain  in  economic  welfare.    

Page  103     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Key  point:    
For  mutually  beneficial  trade  to  take  place,  the  two  nations  have  to  agree  an  acceptable  rate  of  exchange  
of  one  product  for  another.  If  the  two  countries  trade  at  a  rate  of  exchange  of  two  digital  cameras  for  one  
vacuum  cleaner,  the  post-­‐trade  position  will  be  as  follows:  
o The  UK  exports  420  vacuum  cleaners  to  the  USA  and  receives  840  digital  cameras  
o The  USA  exports  840  digital  cameras  and  imports  420  vacuum  cleaners  
Stage  3:  Showing  the  Gains  from  Trade  -­‐  Post  Trade  Output  /  Consumption  
 
  DIGITAL  CAMERAS   VACUUM  CLEANERS  
UK   840   780  
United  States   2520   1020  
Total   3360   1800  
 
Compared  with  the  pre-­‐specialisation  output  levels,  consumers  now  have  an  increased  supply  of  both  
goods    
 
What  are  the  key  assumptions  behind  this  theory  of  trade?  
This  theory  of  trade  based  on  comparative  advantage  rests  on  a  number  of  assumptions:  
1. Occupational  mobility  of  factors  of  production  -­‐  this  means  that  switching  factor  resources  from  
one  industry  to  another  involves  no  loss  of  efficiency  and  productivity.  In  reality  we  know  that  
factors  of  production  are  not  perfectly  mobile  –  labour  immobility  is  a  root  cause  of  structural  
unemployment.  
2. Constant  returns  to  scale  (i.e.  doubling  the  inputs  used  in  the  production  process  leads  to  a  
doubling  of  output)  –  this  is  merely  a  simplifying  assumption.    
3. Insignificant  externalities  from  production  and/or  consumption  –  no  discussion  about  the  overall  
costs  and  benefits  of  specialisation  and  trade  should  ignore  environmental  considerations  arising  
from  increased  production  and  trade  between  countries.  
The  Changing  Balance  of  World  Economic  Power:  The  Share  of  Global  GDP  from  1980  to  2015  By  Region  
 
40%  

35%  

30%  

25%  

20%  

15%  

10%  

5%  

0%  
1980   1990   2000   2010   2015  

US   EU-­‐28   Asia-­‐Pacific  
 
 
   

Page  104     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
What  are  the  Main  Sources  of  Comparative  Advantage?  
• Comparative  advantage  is  a  dynamic  concept  meaning  that  it  changes  over  time.    
• For  a  country,  some  of  the  factors  below  are  important  in  determining  the  relative  unit  costs  of  
production:  
1. The  quantity  and  quality  of  natural  resources  available  for  example  some  countries  have  an  
abundant  supply  of  good  quality  farmland,  oil  and  gas,  or  easily  accessible  fossil  fuels.  Climate  and  
geography  have  key  roles  in  creating  differences  in  comparative  advantage.  More  recently  the  
shale  gas  revolution  in  the  United  States  and  elsewhere  is  leading  to  shifts  in  the  future  pattern  of  
world  energy  production  and  trade  as  North  America  becomes  more  energy  sufficient.  Severe  
worries  about  water  scarcity  in  the  future  in  large  parts  of  the  developing  world  might  have  hugely  
significant  effects  on  their  ability  to  export  products.  
2. Demographics  -­‐  An  ageing  population,  net  outward  or  inward  migration,  educational  
improvements  and  women’s  participation  in  the  labour  force  will  all  affect  the  quantity  and  quality  
of  the  labour  force  available  for  industries  engaged  in  international  trade.  
3. Rates  of  capital  investment  including  infrastructure:  Greater  public  infrastructure  investment  can  
reduce  trade  costs  and  hence  increasing  supply  capacity.  Investment  in  roads,  ports  and  other  
transport  infrastructure  strengthens  regional  trade  ties.  ICT  infrastructure  is  particularly  important  
for  countries  wanting  to  build  a  competitive  advantage  in  information-­‐intensive  sectors  such  as  
mobile  telecommunications,  gaming  and  financial  services  
4. Increasing  returns  to  scale  and  the  division  of  labour  –  increasing  returns  occur  when  output  
grows  more  than  proportionate  to  inputs.  Rising  demand  in  markets  where  trade  takes  place  helps  
to  encourage  specialisation,  higher  productivity  and  internal  and  external  economies  of  scale.  
These  long-­‐run  scale  economies  can  give  regions  and  countries  a  significant  unit  cost  advantage.    
5. Investment  in  research  &  development  which  can  drive  innovation  and  invention  
6. Fluctuations  in  the  exchange  rate,  which  affect  the  relative  prices  of  exports  and  imports  and  cause  
changes  in  demand  from  domestic  and  overseas  customers.  
7. Import  controls  such  as  tariffs,  export  subsidies  and  quotas  –  these  can  be  used  to  create  an  
artificial  comparative  advantage  for  a  country's  domestic  producers.  
8. Non-­‐price  competitiveness  of  producers  -­‐  covering  factors  such  as  the  standard  of  product  design  
and  innovation,  product  reliability,  quality  of  after-­‐sales  support.  Many  countries  are  now  building  
comparative  advantage  in  high-­‐knowledge  industries  and  specializing  in  specific  knowledge  sectors  
–  an  example  is  the  division  of  knowledge  in  the  medical  industry,  some  countries  specialize  in  
heart  surgery,  others  in  pharmaceuticals  –  health  tourism  is  becoming  more  important.  
9. Institutions  –  these  are  important  for  comparative  advantage  and  for  growth  too.  Banking  systems  
are  needed  to  provide  capital  for  investment  and  export  credits,  legal  systems  help  to  enforce  
contracts,  maintaining  transparent  and  effective  political  institutions  and  the  stability  of  democracy  
is  a  key  factor  behind  decisions  about  where  international  capital  flows.  
Comparative  advantage  is  often  a  self-­‐reinforcing  process  
o Entrepreneurs  in  a  country  develop  a  new  comparative  advantage  in  a  product  either  because  they  
find  ways  of  producing  it  more  efficiently  or  they  create  a  genuinely  new  product  that  finds  a  
growing  demand  in  home  and  international  markets  
o Rising  demand  and  output  encourages  the  exploitation  of  economies  of  scale;  higher  profits  can  be  
reinvested  in  the  business  to  fund  further  product  development,  marketing  and  a  wider  distribution  
network.  Skilled  labour  is  attracted  into  the  industry  and  so  on  
o The  expansion  of  an  industry  leads  to  benefits  from  exploiting  external  economies  of  scale.  
 

Page  105     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Trends  in  global  export  volume  of  trade  in  goods  from  1950  to  2014  (in  billion  U.S.  dollars)  
 
20000  

18000  

16000  
Export  volume  in  billion  U.S.  dollars  

14000  

12000  

10000  

8000  

6000  

4000  

2000  

0  
2014   2013   2012   2011   2010   2009   2008   2007   2006   2005   2000   1995   1990   1985   1980   1975   1970   1965   1960   1955   1950  
 
 
Summary  of  the  main  gains  from  trade  
 

Bewer  access  to  new  


Helps  to  reduce  scale  of   Increased  market   technologies  from  
extreme  poverty   competton  
different  countries  

Inflows  of  specialist     Exploitng  economies  of   Bewer  use  of  our  scarce  
knowledge   scale  in  bigger  markets   resources  

 
 
   

Page  106     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Why  is  Trade  important  for  Growth  and  Development?  
Successful  international  trade  provides:  
• A  source  of  foreign  exchange  to  help  a  nation’s  balance  of  payments  
• A  way  of  financing  imports  of  essential  capital  equipment  /  technology  and  components  
• An  injection  of  demand  into  the  circular  flow  of  income  and  spending  
• Increased  employment  in  export  industries  and  multiplier  effects  in  other  businesses  and  sectors  
helping  to  service  export  suppliers  
But  overseas  trade  also  has  risks  
• Volatile  global  prices  affecting  export  revenues  and  profits  
• Risks  that  exports  will  be  affected  by  geo-­‐political  uncertainty  and  cyclical  shifts  in  demand  
• Opening  up  an  economy  to  trade  and  investment  may  cause  rising  structural  unemployment  in  
some  industries  as  the  pattern  of  demand  changes  over  time  
Wider  gains  from  international  trade  
1. Welfare  gains  from  lower  prices  and  increased  consumer  choice  
2. Economies  of  scale  –  trade  encourages  firms  to  exploit  scale  economies  leading  to  lower  unit  costs  
that  passed  on  in  lower  prices  
3. Market  competition  –  trade  promotes  increased  competition  particularly  for  monopolies  that  
would  otherwise  face  little  competition.  Trade  is  also  a  spur  for  higher  labour  productivity  
4. Gains  from  innovation  –  trade  stimulates  innovations  bringing  better  products  for  consumers  
5. Access  to  new  technology  and  inflows  of  new  knowledge:  trade  gives  countries  access  to  new  
technologies.  Trade  is  a  stimulus  to  the  exchange  of  ideas  and  inflow  of  human  capital  
6. Rising  living  standards  and  a  reduction  in  extreme  poverty  –  countries  that  are  more  open  to  
trade  achieve  faster  economic  over  the  long  run  and  have  higher  per  capita  incomes.  Growth  
through  trade  directly  benefits  the  world's  poor  although  free  trade  is  not  necessarily  equitable  
UK”s  Main  Import  Partners  in  2013  
 
16.0%  
13.9%  
14.0%  

12.0%  
Share  of  total  imports  

10.0%  
8.5%   8.5%  
8.0%  
6%  
5.6%  
6.0%   5%  

4.0%  

2.0%  

0.0%  
Germany   Netherlands   China   France   United  States   Belgium  
 
 

Page  107     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
The  European  Union  (28  countries)  is  the  biggest  source  of  imported  goods  and  services  for  the  UK.  But  
China  is  now  ahead  of  USA  as  a  supplier  of  products  
 
UK”s  Main  Export  Partners  in  2013  
 
16.0%  
13.8%  
14.0%  

12.0%  
Share  of  total  exports  

10.0%   9%   8.8%  
7.6%  
8.0%  
6.4%  
5.7%  
6.0%  
4.3%  
4.0%  

2.0%  

0.0%  
Switzerland   Germany   United  States   Netherlands   France   Ireland   Belgium  
 
 
More  than  half  of  the  UK’s  exports  go  to  the  other  nations  inside  the  European  Union.  Switzerland  is  our  
biggest  export  market  but  is  outside  of  the  EU.  
 
Top  export  countries  worldwide  in  2013  (in  billion  U.S.  dollars)  
 

Exports  in  billion  U.S.  dollars  


0   500   1000   1500   2000   2500  
China   2,209.63  
United  States   1,578.97  
Germany   1,452.8  
Japan   715.1  
Netherlands   663.52  
France   579.65  
Korea,  Republic  of   559.63  
United  Kingdom   541.35  
Hong  Kong,  China   535.55  
Russian  Federaton   523.33  
Italy   517.67  
Belgium   468.82  
Canada   458.14  
Singapore   410.25  
Mexico   380.19  
 
   

Page  108     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
21.The  Balance  of  Payments  
 
What  is  the  Balance  of  Payments?  
• The  balance  of  payments  (BOP)  records  all  financial  transactions  made  between  consumers,  
businesses  and  the  government  in  one  country  with  other  nations  
• Inflows  of  foreign  currency  are  counted  as  a  positive  entry  (e.g.  exports  sold  overseas)  
• Outflows  of  foreign  currency  are  counted  as  a  negative  entry  (e.g.  imported  goods  and  services)  
Measuring  the  current  account  
• The  current  account  of  the  balance  of  payments  comprises  the  balance  of  trade  in  goods  and  
services  plus  net  investment  incomes  from  overseas  assets  and  net  transfers  
Trade  in  goods  includes  items  such  as:   Trade  in  services  includes:  
! Manufactured  goods   ! Banking,  insurance  and  consultancy  
! Semi-­‐finished  goods  and  components   ! Other   financial   services   including   foreign  
! Energy  products   exchange  and  derivatives  trading  
! Raw  Materials   ! Tourism  industry  
! Consumer  goods   ! Transport  and  shipping  
! (i)  Durable  goods   ! Education  and  health  services  
! (ii)  Non-­‐durable  goods  e.g.  foods   ! Research  and  development  
! Capital  goods  (e.g.  equipment)   ! Cultural  arts  
 
A  summary  of  items  on  the  current  account  of  the  balance  of  payments  is  shown  below  
 

•   Finished  manufactured  goods,  components,  raw  


Trade  Balance  in  Goods   materials  
•   Energy  products,  Capital  technology  

•   Banking,  Insurance,  Consultancy  


•   Tourism,  Transport,  Logistcs  
Trade  Balance  in  Services  
•   Shipping,  Educaton,  Health,  
•   Research,  Cultural  Arts  

•   Overseas  aid  /  debt  relief  


Net  Money  Transfers  
•   Private  money  transfers  e.g.  From  migrant  workers  

Net  Investment  Income  from   •   Profits,  interest  and  dividends  from  investments  in  other  
Overseas  Assets   countries  e.g.  The  profits  from  transnatonal  businesses    

 
 
Worked  example  of  the  current  account  balance  calculation  
• The  current  account  is  trade  in  goods  and  services,  net  investment  incomes  and  net  transfers.  
• If  a  country  is  running  a  deficit,  there  is  a  net  outflow  of  demand  and  income  from  the  circular  flow.    

Page  109     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Net  Balance  
Item  of  the  Balance  of  Payments  
$  Billion  

Current  Account  
 
(1)  Balance  of  trade  in  goods   -­‐25  
(2)  Balance  of  trade  in  services   +10  
(3)  Net  investment  income   -­‐12  
(4)  Net  overseas  transfers   +8  
 Sum  of  1+2+3+4  =  Current  account  balance   -­‐19  
 
UK  BoP  Current  Account  Balance  in  Recent  Years  
   

Current  balance  =  sum   (1)  Transfers  and   (2)  Net  trade  balance   (3)  Net  investment  
*  Forecast    
of  1  +  2  +  3   other   in  goods  and  services   income  

%  Of  GDP   %  Of  GDP   %  Of  GDP   %  Of  GDP  


 
2008   -­‐3.7   -­‐0.9   -­‐3.0   0.2  
2009   -­‐2.8   -­‐1.0   -­‐1.9   0.1  
2010   -­‐2.6   -­‐1.3   -­‐2.4   1.1  
2011   -­‐1.7   -­‐1.4   -­‐1.5   1.2  
2012   -­‐3.7   -­‐1.4   -­‐2.1   -­‐0.3  
2013   -­‐4.5   -­‐1.6   -­‐2.0   -­‐0.9  
2014   -­‐5.9   -­‐1.5   -­‐2.0   -­‐2.4  
2015*  
-­‐5.0   -­‐1.3   -­‐1.8   -­‐1.8  
(Forecast)  
 
UK  Trade  in  Services  
 
15%  

10%  

5%  
%  of    GDP    

0%  

-­‐5%  

-­‐10%  
1997  1998  1999  2000  2001  2002  2003  2004  2005  2006  2007  2008  2009  2010  2011  2012  2013  2014  
Q1   Q1   Q1   Q1   Q1   Q1   Q1   Q1   Q1   Q1   Q1   Q1   Q1   Q1   Q1   Q1   Q1   Q1  
Net  trade   Exports   Imports  
 
Page  110     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
The  UK  runs  a  large  trade  surplus  in  services.  Net  exports  of  business  and  financial  services  are  strong  as  is  
the  sale  of  creative  service  e.g.  films  and  television  series.  Britain  runs  a  trade  deficit  in  travel  and  tourism.  
 
UK  Trade  in  Goods  
 
30%  

25%  

20%  

15%  

%  Of  GDP    
10%  

5%  

0%  

-­‐5%  

-­‐10%  
1997   1998   1999   2000   2001   2002   2003   2004   2005   2006   2007   2008   2009   2010   2011   2012   2013   2014  
Q1   Q1   Q1   Q1   Q1   Q1   Q1   Q1   Q1   Q1   Q1   Q1   Q1   Q1   Q1   Q1   Q1   Q1  

 Net  Trade     Exports      Imports  


 
 
The  UK  runs  a  large  and  growing  trade  deficit  in  goods.  The  economy  is  a  big  net  importer  of  finished  
manufactured  products  and  is  also  now  a  net  importer  of  oil  and  gas.  
 
UK  Trade  Balances  in  Goods  and  Services  with  the  EU  
The  chart  below  shows  the  annual  trade  balance  in  goods  and  services  that  the  UK  runs  with  a  selection  of  
fellow  EU  member  countries.  The  data  is  measured  in  £  billion.  
 

Page  111     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
20

10

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70
2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013

Rest of the EU Spain Netherlands Ireland Germany France


 
 
China  –  An  Example  of  a  Country  with  a  Structural  Trade  Surplus  
 
China:  trade  balance  from  2004  to  2014  (in  billion  U.S.  dollars)  
   
450  

400   382.46  
Trade  balance  in  billion  U.S.  dollars  

350  
298.13  
300  
264.34   259.24  
250   230.75  
195.69  
200   177.52   181.51  
154.9  
150  
102  
100  

50   32.1  

0  
2004   2005   2006   2007   2008   2009   2010   2011   2012   2013   2014  
 
 
What  does  a  current  account  deficit  mean?  
• Running  a  deficit  on  the  current  accout  means  that  a  country  is  not  paying  its  way  in  the  global  
economy.  There  is  a  net  outflow  of  demand  from  the  circular  flow  of  income  and  spending.    
• The  current  account  does  not  have  to  balance  because  the  balance  of  payments  also  includes  the  
capital  account.  The  capital  account  tracks  capital  flows  in  and  out  of  a  country.  This  includes  
portfolio  capital  flows  (e.g.  share  transactions)  and  direct  capital  flows  arising  from  foreign  
investment.    

Page  112     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
• If  a  country  is  running  a  current  account  deficit,  it  needs  to  balance  this  with  a  surplus  on  the  
capital  account;  this  is  achieved  by  measures  to  attract  inflows  of  capital  from  other  countries.  
What  are  the  main  causes  of  a  current  account  deficit?  
• Poor  price  and  non-­‐price  competitiveness  
o Higher  inflation  than  a  nation’s  main  trading  partners  
o Low  levels  of  capital  investment  and  research  and  development  /  innovation  
o Weaknesses  in  design,  branding  and  other  non-­‐price  factors  
• Strong  exchange  rate  affecting  exports  and  imports  
o High  currency  value  increases  the  prices  of  exports  in  overseas  markets  
o Appreciating  currency  also  makes  imports  cheaper  causing  domestic  consumers  to  switch  
their  spending  towards  cheaper  imported  products  
• Recession  in  one  or  more  major  trade  partner  countries  
o Recession  cuts  the  total  value  of  exports  to  these  countries  
• Volatile  global  prices  (e.g.  Commodities)  
o Exporters  of  primary  commodities  might  be  hit  by  a  fall  in  world  prices  
o Importing  nations  could  be  hit  by  higher  prices  for  oil  and  gas  
The  Export  Multiplier  Effect:    
Many  industries  rely  heavily  on  our  key  export  industries  remaining  competitive  –  these  include:  
• Transportation  /  freight  /  logistics  businesses  /  service  businesses  at  airports  
• Trade  finance  businesses  and  insurance  businesses  
Economic  policies  to  reduce  a  trade  deficit  
• Demand  management:    A  tightening  of  fiscal  and/or  monetary  policy  reduces  real  spending  power  
of  consumers  and  leads  to  lower  spending  on  imports  (fall  in  M  improves  trade  balance)  
• Currency  adjustment:  Lower  exchange  rate  reduces  the  foreign  price  of  exports  and  makes  imports  
more  expensive  –  causes  changes  in  demand  
• Supply-­‐side  improvements:    
o Policies  to  raise  labour  productivity  and  encourage  start-­‐ups  with  export  potential  e.g.  Life  
sciences,  digital  etc  
o Investment  in  human  capital  to  boost  productive  capacity  and  competitiveness  in  high-­‐
value  industries  such  as  bio-­‐technology,  engineering,  medicine,  tourism    
• Protectionist  measures  such  as  import  quotas,  tariffs  and  other  non-­‐tariff  barriers  (NB:  The  UK  is  
limited  by  global  trade  agreements  and  cannot  impose  tariffs  unilaterally  to  improve  their  trade)  
   

Page  113     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Competitiveness  
External  competitiveness  is  the  ability  to  sell  goods  and  services  at  competitive  prices  in  a  foreign  country  
• Cost  competitiveness  
o Differences  in  unit  labour  costs  –  reflected  in  producer  prices  
•  Non-­‐price  competitiveness  
o Product  quality,  design,  reliability  and  performance,  choice,  after-­‐sales  services,  marketing,  
branding  and  the  availability  and  cost  of  replacement  parts  
• Non-­‐wage  costs:  
o Costs  of  meeting  environmental  /  health  regulations  
o Environmental  taxes  e.g.  carbon  taxes  and  waste  taxes  
o Employment  protection  laws  and  health  and  safety  laws  
o Requirements  to  provide  pensions  for  employees  
Index  of  the  25  most  competitive  countries  in  2014  (World  Economic  Forum  Rankings)  
 
120  

100  

80  
Index  Value  

60  

40  

20  

0  
Switzerland  
Singapore  
Hong  Kong  
Sweden  

Canada  
UAE  

Luxembourg  
Malaysia  
Taiwan  
Netherlands  
Ireland  

Australia  
Finland  

New  Zealand  
Japan  
Austria  
China  Mainland  
Israel  
Iceland  
Norway  
Germany  

Denmark  

Qatar  
USA  

UK  

 
 
 
 
   

Page  114     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
22.Monetary  Policy  
Introduction  to  monetary  policy  
• Monetary  policy  involves  changes  in  interest  rates,  the  supply  of  money  &  credit  and  exchange  
rates  to  influence  the  economy  
• Monetary  policy  influences  the  decisions  that  we  make  about  how  much  we  save,  borrow  and  
spend  
• Decisions  made  by  the  central  banks  that  operate  monetary  policy  can  have  a  powerful  effect  on  
consumers  and  businesses  and  on  macroeconomic  indicators  such  as  GDP  growth  and  inflation  
• Changes  in  interest  rates  have  both  demand  and  supply-­‐side  effects.  The  demand-­‐side  effects  are  
most  likely  in  the  short  term  
What  is  Money?  
Money  is  any  asset  that  is  acceptable  as  a  medium  of  exchange  in  payment  for  goods  and  services.    The  
functions  of  money  are  as  follows:  
1. A  medium  of  exchange  used  in  payment  for  goods  and  services  
2. A  unit  of  account  used  to  relative  measure  prices  and  draw  up  accounts  
3. A  standard  of  deferred  payment  –  for  example  when  using  credit  to  purchase  goods  and  services  
now  but  pay  for  them  later  
4. A  store  of  value  -­‐  money  holds  its  value  unless  there  is  a  situation  of  accelerating  inflation.  As  the  
general  price  level  rises,  so  the  internal  value  of  a  unit  of  currency  decreases.    
 
All  of  the  following  are  important  aspects  of  monetary  policy  

Market  interest  rates   Bank  Lending   Currency  markets  

Inflaton  targets   Bank  of  England   European  Central  Bank  

 
Interest  Rates  
• An  interest  rate  is  the  reward  for  saving  and  the  cost  of  borrowing  expressed  as  a  percentage  of  the  
money  saved  or  borrowed  
• There  are  many  different  interest  rates  in  an  economy  
o Interest  rates  on  savings  in  bank  and  other  accounts  
o Borrowing  interest  rates  
Page  115     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
! Mortgage  interest  rates  (housing  loans)  
! Credit  card  interest  rates  and  pay-­‐day  loans  
! Interest  rates  on  government  and  corporate  bonds  
•  The  Bank  of  England  uses  nterest  rates  to  help  regulate  the  economy  and  meet  macro  objectives  
 The  Real  Rate  of  Interest  
• The  real  rate  of  interest  is  the  money  rate  of  interest  minus  the  rate  of  inflation.    
• So  if  a  saver  is  receiving  a  money  rate  of  interest  of  6%  on  his  savings,  but  price  inflation  is  running  
at  3%  per  year,  the  real  rate  of  return  on  these  savings  is  only  +  3%.  
• Real  interest  rates  become  negative  when  the  nominal  rate  of  interest  is  less  than  inflation,  for  
example  if  inflation  is  5%  and  nominal  interest  rates  are  4%,  the  real  cost  of  borrowing  money  is  
negative  at  -­‐1%.    
UK  Monetary  Policy  –  A  Brief  History  
 
1980s  
•  Belief  in  the  theory  of  monetarism,  money  supply  targets  
•  Late  1980s  –  shadowing  the  German  Mark  to  control  inflaton  

1990-­‐1992  
•  UK  entered  the  EU  exchange  rate  mechanism  in  October  1990  
•  A  system  of  semi-­‐fixed  exchange  rates  –  pegged  to  the  Mark  

1992-­‐1997  
•  Sept  1992  –  Sterling  devalued  /  UK  leaves  ERM  on  Black  Wednesday  
•  Move  back  to  floatng  exchange  rates  –  government  stll  sets  rates  

1997  to  2015  


•  May  1997  -­‐  Bank  of  England  made  independent  of  government  
•  Monetary  Policy  Commiwee  set  up  to  set  official  interest  rates  

 
 
   

Page  116     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Monetary  Policy  Interest  Rates  (Per  Cent)  for  Selected  Nations  (Annual  average)  
 
2007   2008   2010   2012   2013   2015  
 
Brazil   12.1   12.4   9.9   8.6   8.3   13.5  
United  States   5.1   2.1   0.1   0.1   0.1   0.3  
Australia   6.4   6.7   4.4   3.7   2.7   2.1  
China   2.3   2.8   1.8   2.3   2.3   1.6  
Hong  Kong,  China   6.6   3.4   0.5   0.5   0.5   0.5  
India   7.7   8.0   5.5   8.1   7.5   7.3  
Japan   0.5   0.5   0.1   0.1   0.1   0.1  
New  Zealand   8.3   5.0   3.0   2.5   2.5   3.5  
Singapore   2.8   1.3   0.4   0.3   0.3   0.5  
South  Korea   4.7   4.8   2.2   3.1   2.6   1.7  
Eurozone   3.9   3.7   1.0   0.9   0.6   0.1  
United  Kingdom   5.5   4.7   0.5   0.5   0.5   0.5  
 
The  Bank  of  England  and  the  handling  of  Monetary  Policy  
• Founded  in  1694  and  nationalized  in  1946,  the  Bank  of  England  is  charged  with  providing  monetary  
and  financial  stability  for  the  United  Kingdom    
• The  Bank  of  England  has  been  independent  of  government  since  1997  
• The  Monetary  Policy  Committee  (MPC)  has  nine  members,  some  appointed  by  the  government  and  
some  by  the  Bank  of  England.    
• The  Governor  of  the  Bank  (currently  Mark  Carney)  has  the  casting  vote  if  there  is  an  equally  split  
decision  on  interest  rates  
• Each  month  the  MPC  meets  to  consider  the  latest  news  on  the  UK  and  global  economy  
• Their  job  is  to  make  a  judgement  on  what  is  the  appropriate  level  of  policy  interest  rates  for  the  UK  
economy  consistent  with  the  need  to  meet  an  inflation  target  set  by  the  government  
• That  inflation  target  is  consumer  price  inflation  of  2%    
• The  MPC  has  one  eye  on  maintaining  GDP  growth  (although  a  set  rate  of  GDP  growth  is  not  part  of  
their  target).  Inflation  is  allowed  to  vary  by  1%  either  side  of  the  2%  target  –  so  they  have  some  
leeway.  
• Policy  interest  rates  in  the  UK  have  remained  the  same  (0.5%)  since  March  2009  
Key  Roles  for  a  Central  Bank  
• Monetary  stability:  Conducting  monetary  policy  to  ensure  stable  prices  and  confidence  in  the  
currency.    Many  countries  have  an  inflation  target  –  often  set  by  the  Government  for  a  central  
bank  to  achieve.  E.g.  the  UK  Government  sets  the  Bank  of  England  an  inflation  target  of  2%.  Their  
aim  is  to  keep  the  annual  rate  of  consumer  prices  inflation  (CPI)  within  1%  of  the  target.    
• Financial  stability:  This  means  overseeing  the  financial  system  so  that  there  is  an  efficient  flow  of  
savings  and  loans  and  confidence  in  financial  intermediaries  such  as  banks.  Depositors  need  to  
know  for  example  that  their  savings  are  safe  and  that  banks  and  other  lenders  are  acting  
responsibly.    
• When  financial  stability  breaks  down  there  are  damaging  economic  and  social  consequences.    

Page  117     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Factors  considered  by  the  Bank  of  England  when  setting  interest  rates  
At  each  of  their  rate-­‐setting  meetings,  the  members  of  the  MPC  consider  a  huge  amount  of  information  on  
the  state  of  the  economy.  Here  are  some  of  the  factors  they  consider  when  making  rate  decisions.  
• GDP  growth  and  spare  capacity:  The  rate  of  growth  of  GDP  and  the  size  of  the  output  gap.  Their  
main  task  is  to  set  monetary  policy  so  that  AD  grows  in  line  with  the  country’s  productive  potential.  
• Bank  lending  and  consumer  credit  figures  -­‐  including  the  levels  of  equity  withdrawal  from  the  
housing  market  and  also  data  on  credit  card  lending  which  supports  demand  on  the  high  street  
• Equity  markets  (share  prices)  and  house  prices  -­‐  both  are  considered  important  in  determining  
household  wealth,  which  then  feeds  through  to  borrowing  and  retail  spending  
• Consumer  confidence  and  business  confidence  –  confidence  surveys  can  provide  “advance  
warning”  of  turning  points  in  the  economic  cycle.  These  are  called  ‘leading  indicators’  
• Growth  of  wages,  average  earnings  and  unit  labour  costs  -­‐  wage  inflation  might  be  a  cause  of  cost-­‐
push  inflation  so  the  Bank  of  England  looks  carefully  at  what  is  happening  to  wages  
• Unemployment  figures  -­‐  and  survey  evidence  on  job  vacancies  and  shortages  of  skilled  labour.  
• Trends  in  global  foreign  exchange  markets  –  a  weaker  exchange  rate  could  be  seen  as  a  threat  to  
inflation  because  it  raises  the  prices  of  imported  goods  and  services.  A  strong  exchange  rate  might  
bring  down  inflation  but  risk  causing  a  deeper  economic  slowdown  via  a  fall  in  exports  
• International  data  -­‐  including  recent  developments  in  the  Euro  Zone,  BRIC  nations,  emerging  
market  countries  and  the  United  States  and  Japan.  
1. The  key  point  is  that  the  Monetary  Policy  Committee  considers  many  indicators  from  both  the  
demand  and  the  supply-­‐side  of  the  economy.    
2. They  then  have  to  make  a  judgement  about  what  this  evidence  says  about  inflationary  pressures  
over  a  two  year  forecast  horizon.    
3. Why  do  they  have  to  look  up  to  two  years  ahead?  Because  when  interest  rates  are  changed,  it  
takes  time  for  them  to  have  an  effect  on  aggregate  demand  and  prices.  Uncertain  time  lags  in  a  
world  of  many  external  shocks  make  the  handling  of  monetary  policy  a  difficult  job!  
Forward  Guidance  in  Setting  Interest  Rates  
• Forward  Guidance  was  first  introduced  by  Bank  of  England  Governor,  Mark  Carney  in  August  2013  
• It  has  been  signalled  that  the  Bank  of  England  will  leave  their  policy  interest  rates  unchanged  as  
long  as  the  unemployment  rate  is  above  7.0%  and  inflation  is  under  control    
• The  aim  is  to  build  confidence  by  signalling  that  official  interest  rates  would  stay  at  low  levels  for  
some  time    
• In  2014,  Mark  Carney  signalled  that  forward  guidance  would  evolve  –  LFS  unemployment  is  not  the  
sole  data  measure  to  be  used  –  they  will  look  at  a  range  of  measures  of  spare  capacity  
   

Page  118     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
The  Monetary  Policy  Transmission  Mechanism  
 

 
 
What  are  the  main  effects  of  changes  in  interest  rates?  
 
It  is  worth  remembering  that  when  the  Bank  is  making  a  decision,  there  will  be  lots  of  other  events  and  
policy  decisions  being  made  elsewhere  in  the  economy,  for  example  changes  in  fiscal  policy  by  the  
government,  or  perhaps  a  change  in  world  oil  prices  or  the  exchange  rate.  In  macroeconomics  the  ceteris  
paribus  assumption  (all  other  factors  held  equal)  rarely  applies!  
• There  are  several  ways  in  which  changes  in  interest  rates  influence  aggregate  demand,  output  and  
prices.  These  are  collectively  known  as  the  transmission  mechanism  of  monetary  policy  
• One  of  the  channels  that  the  Monetary  Policy  Committee  in  the  UK  can  use  to  influence  aggregate  
demand,  and  inflation,  is  via  the  lending  and  borrowing  rates  charged  in  the  financial  markets.    
• When  the  Bank’s  own  base  interest  rate  goes  up,  then  commercial  banks  and  building  societies  will  
typically  increase  how  much  they  charge  on  loans  and  the  interest  that  they  offer  on  savings.    
• This  tends  to  discourage  businesses  from  taking  out  loans  to  finance  investment  and  encourages  
the  consumer  to  save  rather  than  spend  —  and  so  depresses  aggregate  demand  
• Conversely,  when  the  base  rate  falls,  banks  cut  the  market  rates  offered  on  loans  and  savings  and  
the  effect  ought  to  be  a  stimulus  to  demand  and  output.  
A  key  influence  played  by  interest  rate  changes  is  the  effect  on  confidence  –  in  particular  household’s  
confidence  about  their  own  personal  financial  circumstances.    
 
Changes  in  interest  rates  affect:  
1. Housing  market  &  house  prices:    
a. Higher  interest  rates  increase  the  cost  of  mortgages  and  reduce  the  demand  for  housing.  
This  will  affect  household  wealth  and  put  a  squeeze  on  equity  withdrawal  (where  
consumers  borrow  money  secured  on  rising  house  prices)  
2. Effective  disposable  incomes  of  mortgage  payers:    
a. If  interest  rates  increase,  the  income  of  homeowners  who  have  variable-­‐rate  mortgages  
will  fall  –  leading  to  a  decline  in  their  effective  purchasing  power  
Page  119     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
b. The  effects  of  a  rate  change  are  greater  when  the  level  of  existing  mortgage  debt  is  high  as  
this  makes  property  owners  more  exposed  to  higher  costs  of  repaying  debts.    
3. Disposable  income  of  savers:    
a. A  rise  in  interest  rates  boosts  the  disposable  income  of  people  who  have  paid  off  their  
mortgage  and  who  have  positive  net  savings  in  bank  and  building  society  accounts  
b. But  if  the  rate  of  interest  is  lower  than  the  rate  of  inflation,  then  the  annual  real  return  on  
saving  will  be  negative.  
4. Consumer  demand  for  credit:    
a. Higher  interest  rates  increase  the  cost  of  paying  the  debt  on  credit  cards  and  should  lead  to  
a  deceleration  in  retail  sales  and  spending  on  consumer  durables  especially  items  such  as  
cars  and  household  appliances  typically  bought  on  credit.  
5. Business  capital  investment:    
a. Firms  often  take  the  actual  and  expected  level  of  interest  rates  into  account  when  deciding  
whether  or  not  to  go  ahead  with  new  capital  investment  spending  
b. A  rise  in  interest  rates  may  dampen  confidence  and  lead  to  a  reduction  in  planned  capital  
investment.  However,  many  factors  influence  investment  decisions  other  than  rate  
changes.  
6. Consumer  and  business  confidence:    
a. The  relationship  between  interest  rates  and  business  and  consumer  confidence  is  complex,  
and  depends  crucially  on  prevailing  economic  conditions  
b. When  businesses  and  consumers  are  worried  about  the  recession,  an  interest  rate  cut  can  
boost  confidence  because  it  reassures  the  public  that  the  Bank  is  alert  to  the  dangers  of  a  
slump  
c. Some  people  might  take  emergency  interest  rate  cuts  as  a  sign  that  the  wider  economy  is  
in  difficulty  and  hard  times  lie  ahead.  
7. Interest  rates  and  the  exchange  rate:    
a. Higher  UK  interest  rates  might  lead  to  an  appreciation  of  the  exchange  rate  particularly  if  
UK  interest  rates  rise  relative  to  those  in  the  Euro  Zone  and  the  United  States  attracting  
inflows  of  “hot  money”  into  the  banking  system.    
b. A  stronger  exchange  rate  reduces  the  competitiveness  of  UK  exports  in  overseas  markets  
because  it  makes  our  exports  appear  more  expensive  when  priced  in  a  foreign  currency  
leading  to  a  decline  in  export  volumes  and  market  share.    
c. It  also  reduces  the  sterling  price  of  imported  goods  and  services  leading  to  lower  prices  and  
rising  import  penetration.  If  the  trade  deficit  in  goods  and  services  widens,  this  is  a  net  
withdrawal  of  demand  from  the  circular  flow  and  acts  to  reduce  excess  demand  in  the  
economy.  
Key  points:  
1. A  reduction  in  interest  rates  and/or  an  increase  in  the  supply  of  money  and  credit  in  an  economy  is  
called  an  expansionary  monetary  policy  or  a  reflationary  monetary  policy  
2. An  increase  in  interest  rates  and/or  attempts  to  control  or  reduce  the  supply  of  money  and  credit  is  
called  a  contractionary  monetary  policy  or  a  deflationary  monetary  policy  

Page  120     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Conventional  monetary  policy  -­‐  How  changes  in  interest  rates  feed  through  the  economy  to  affect  prices  

Market  interest  rates    


E.g.  savings  rates  &  credit  cards  

Domestic    
Demand  
I.e.  C  +  I  +  G  
Asset  prices  e.g.  housing  
E.g.  house  prices  
Aggregate   Domestic  
Demand   Inflationary  
Official  Interest       Pressure  
Rate      

Net    
Business  Expectations  and   External    
Consumer  Confidence   Demand  
Businesses  &  consumers   i.e.  X  -­‐  M  

Import  
Prices  

Consumer  Price    
Inflation  
Value  of  the  e xchange  rate  

 
 
Summary  of  likely  effects  of  a  rise  in  interest  rates  
 

Signals  tghter  monetary   Market  interest  rates  


MPC  raises  interest  rates   policy   increase  

Possible  slowdown  in   Main  effect  will  be  


housing  market   through  via  mortgages   Cost  of  borrowing  rises  

Higher  rates  might  also   Makes  UK  exports  more  


And  contracton  in  retail   cause  currency   expensive  in  overseas  
credit  
appreciaton   markets  

 
Page  121     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
Monetary  Policy  Asymmetry  
• Fluctuations  in  interest  rates  do  not  have  a  uniform  impact  on  the  economy.    
• Some  industries  are  more  affected  by  interest  rate  changes  than  others,  for  example  exporters  and  
industries  connected  to  the  housing  market  
• Some  regions  in  the  UK  are  also  more  sensitive  to  a  change  in  the  direction  of  interest  rates.    
• The  markets  and  businesses  most  affected  by  changes  in  interest  rates  are  those  where  demand  is  
interest  elastic  i.e  demand  responds  elastically  to  a  change  in  interest  rates  or  indirectly  through  
changes  in  the  exchange  rate  
• Good  examples  of  interest-­‐sensitive  industries  include  those  linked  to  the  housing  market¸  
exporters  of  manufactured  goods,  the  construction  industry  and  leisure  services  
• In  contrast,  the  demand  for  basic  foods  and  utilities  is  less  affected  by  short-­‐term  fluctuations  in  
interest  rates  and  is  affected  more  by  changes  in  commodity  prices  such  as  oil  and  gas.  
Quantitative  Easing  (QE)  

• When  policy  interest  rates  are  at  zero  or  close  to  zero,  there  is  a  limit  to  what  conventional  use  of  
monetary  policy  can  do  
• In  2009  the  Bank  of  England  started  a  policy  of  quantitative  easing  (QE)  for  the  first  time.    
• The  aim  of  QE  is  to  support  aggregate  demand  and  avoid  a  recession  becoming  a  deflationary  
depression  
• The  Bank  of  England  uses  QE  to  increase  the  supply  of  money  in  the  banking  system.    
• The  Bank  does  not  print  new  £10,  £20  and  £50  notes  
• Instead  it  uses  money  to  buy  government  bonds    
• There  are  doubts  about  the  effectiveness  of  quantitative  easing  –  bank  lending  has  struggled  to  
recover  since  the  end  of  the  recession.  In  the  summer  of  2015,  the  QE  programme  totalled  £375bn  
How  Quantitative  Easing  (QE)  is  meant  to  work  
The  graphic  below  provides  a  flow  chart  of  how  quantitative  easing  is  designed  to  work.  The  main  
transmission  mechanism  is  through  the  market  for  government  bonds  that  then  has  an  effect  on  other  
long-­‐term  interest  rates  such  as  mortgage  interest  rates  in  the  property  market.  
   

Central  bank  creates  money  electronically  -­‐  It  adds  money  to  
their  balance  sheet  

This  money  is  used  to  buy  financial  assets  -­‐  Mainly  the  
purchase  of  government  bonds  

More  demand  leads  to  higher  prices  for  assets  e.g.  bond  
prices.  Rise  in  price  of  bonds  leads  to  a  lower  yield  (%)  on  
government  bonds  

Can  feed  through  to  fall  in  long  term  interest  rates  e.g.  
mortgages  and  corporate  bonds  

Lower  interest  rates  and  increased  cash  in  the  banking  system  
should  stmulate  the  economy  
 

Page  122     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Consequences  of  Low  Interest  Rates  for  the  Distribution  of  Income  and  Wealth  
Consider  the  effect  of  a  period  of  very  low  nominal  interest  rates  
• The  real  income  of  savers:    
o If  the  rate  of  interest  paid  on  savings  falls  below  the  rate  of  inflation,  people  with  positive  
net  savings  will  see  a  reduction  in  their  real  incomes  
• The  disposable  incomes  of  mortgage-­‐payers:    
o If  interest  rates  fall,  the  income  of  home-­‐owners  who  have  variable-­‐rate  mortgages  will  
increase  leading  to  an  rise  in  their  purchasing  power  
• Interest  rates,  house  prices  and  wealth:    
o Many  factors  affect  house  prices  but  when  the  cost  of  a  mortgage  falls,  standard  theory  
predicts  that  the  demand  for  housing  will  expand  driving  property  values  higher.    
o This  increases  the  net  wealth  of  people  who  own  property  but  makes  it  difficult  for  lower-­‐
income  families  including  young  people  to  find  the  money  to  afford  to  purchase  a  house  or  
flat.    
In  summary  -­‐  when  interest  rates  fall,  there  is  a  re-­‐distribution  of  income  away  from  lenders  (who  receive  
less)  towards  those  with  variable  rate  loans.    
 
Evaluation  Arguments:  Are  very  low  interest  rates  helping  the  UK  economy?  
 

Arguments  that  low  interest  rates  are  helping  UK   Counter-­‐arguments  –  the  disadvantages  of  low  
macro  performance   interest  rates  

1. Savers  have  been  hit  badly  by  negative  real  


1. Keeping  interest  rates  at  0.5%  helps  maintain  
interest  rates  +  income  from  pensions  has  
consumer  &  business  confidence  leading  to  
fallen  –  both  are  bad  for  long  term  economic  
higher  C+I  and  thus  "  AD.  This  is  important  
health.  Raising  interest  rates  will  increase  the  
given  continued  slow  growth  in  our  main  
disposable  incomes  of  millions  of  savers  
export  markets  in  Europe  
2. Low  interest  rates  are  causing  another  
2. If  interest  rates  started  to  rise  now,  the  £  
unsustainable  housing  boom  that  in  the  long  
would  appreciate  as  hot  money  flowed  into  
run  is  damaging  for  the  economy.  We  need  
the  UK.  This  could  choke  off  demand  for  UK  
higher  interest  rates  now  to  control  
exports  #  negative  multiplier  effect  and  
mortgage  debt  and  learn  lessons  from  2007  
some  lost  jobs  in  manufacturing  businesses  
3. Deflation  is  due  to  external  pressures  e.g.  oil  
3. At  a  time  when  the  government  is  pursuing   prices.  Unemployment  is  falling  (5.5%)  and  
fiscal  austerity,  it  makes  sense  for  interest   wages  are  starting  to  rise  (2%)  so  this  is  right  
rate  to  remain  low  to  keep  the  economy   moment  to  start  raising  interest  rates  
growing  and  prevent  deflation   because  they  take  time  to  have  an  effect  

 
 
   

Page  123     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
23.Exchange  Rates  
 
Introduction  to  Exchange  Rates  
• The  exchange  rate  measures  the  external  value  of  one  currency  against  another  currency  
• The  value  of  the  currency  is  determined  in  the  foreign  exchange  market  where  billions  of  $s  of  
currencies  are  traded  every  hour.    
• The  main  currency  traders  are  businesses,  international  investors  and  governments  
 
Data  on  the  UK  Exchange  Rate  over  recent  years  
 
  Sterling  Exchange  Rate   Sterling  v  US  Dollar   Sterling  v  Euro  
Index  
Year   Jan  2005  =  100   £1  Buys   £1  Buys  
2007   103.7   2.00   1.46  
2008   91.1   1.85   1.26  
2009   80.6   1.57   1.12  
2010   80.4   1.55   1.17  
2011   80.0   1.60   1.15  
2012   83.0   1.59   1.23  
2013   81.4   1.56   1.18  
2014   87.0   1.65   1.24  
2015  (May)   91.4   1.55   1.39  
 
Floating  exchange  rates    
• The  UK  operates  with  a  floating  exchange  rate  system  where  the  forces  of  market  demand  and  
supply  determine  the  daily  value  of  one  currency  against  another  
• The  value  of  the  pound  depends  in  how  strong  is  demand  for  the  currency  relative  to  supply  
• If  overseas  investors  want  to  buy  into  sterling  to  take  advantage  of  higher  interest  rates  on  offer  in  
UK  bank  accounts,  they  will  swap  their  own  currencies  for  pounds.    
• This  causes  an  increase  in  the  demand  for  sterling  in  the  foreign  exchange  markets,  and  in  the  
absence  of  other  offsetting  factors,  this  will  cause  an  appreciation.  
• Causes  of  a  currency  appreciation  
o Currencies  tend  to  go  up  in  value  either  when  a  country  is  running  a  large  trade  surplus  –  
which  brings  in  extra  demand  for  a  currency  from  sales  of  exports    
o Currencies  appreciate  when  overseas  investors  regard  the  currency  as  a  good  one  to  buy.  
This  might  be  because  attractive  interest  rates  are  on  offer  by  putting  money  into  savings  
accounts  in  that  currency.    
o Another  cause  is  because  there  are  high  expected  returns  from  other  types  of  investment  
notably  property,  stocks  and  shares  and  so  on.  
How  does  a  change  in  the  exchange  rate  influence  the  economy?    
• Changes  in  the  exchange  rate  affects  demand  for  exports  and  imports,  real  GDP  growth,  inflation,  
business  profits  and  jobs    
• As  with  most  variables  in  economics,  there  are  time  lags  involved.  The  impact  of  movements  in  
currencies  on  the  economy  depends  in  part  on:  
1. The  scale  of  any  change  in  the  exchange  rate  i.e.  a  5%,  10%  or  even  larger  movement  

Page  124     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
2. Whether  the  change  in  the  currency  is  short-­‐term  or  long-­‐term  –  i.e.  is  the  change  in  the  
exchange  rate  temporary  or  likely  to  persist  for  some  time?  
3. How  businesses  and  consumers  respond  to  exchange  rate  fluctuations  –  price  elasticity  of  
demand  is  important  here  i.e.  will  there  be  a  large  change  in  demand  for  exports  and  imports?  
4. The  size  of  any  multiplier  and  accelerator  effects  
5. When  the  currency  movement  takes  place  –  i.e.  at  which  point  of  an  economic  cycle  
Macroeconomic  effects  of  currency  depreciation  
Consider  for  example  a  fall  (depreciation)  in  the  value  of  the  pound  sterling  against  the  US  dollar  
 

When  the  pound  depreciates  against  the  US  dollar  

It  makes  UK  import  prices  RISE   It  makes  UK  export  prices  FALL  

Changes  in  import  and  export  prices  will  affect  demand  

Import  sales  will  CONTRACT   Export  sales  will  EXPAND  

This  will  have  an  effect  on  a  number  of  economic  indicators  

Domeskc  produckon    "   Trade  deficit  $     Domeskc  jobs  "  


 
 
How  can  changes  in  the  exchange  rate  affect  the  rate  of  inflation?  
The  exchange  rate  affects  the  rate  of  inflation  in  a  number  of  direct  and  indirect  ways:  
1. Changes  in  the  prices  of  imports  –  this  has  a  direct  effect  on  the  consumer  price  index.  For  
example,  an  appreciation  of  the  exchange  rate  usually  reduces  the  sterling  price  of  imported  
consumer  goods  and  durables,  raw  materials  and  capital  goods.    

2. Commodity  prices:  Many  commodities  are  priced  in  US  dollars  –  so  a  change  in  the  sterling-­‐dollar  
exchange  rate  has  a  direct  impact  on  the  UK  price  of  commodities  such  as  foodstuffs.  A  stronger  
dollar  makes  it  more  expensive  for  Britain  to  import  these  items.  

3. Changes  in  the  growth  of  UK  exports:  A  higher  exchange  rate  makes  it  harder  to  sell  overseas  
because  of  a  rise  in  relative  UK  prices.  If  exports  slowdown  (price  elasticity  of  demand  is  important  
in  determining  the  scale  of  any  change  in  demand),  then  exporters  may  choose  to  cut  their  prices,  
reduce  output  and  cut-­‐back  employment  levels.  

The  Marshall  Lerner  Condition  


The  Marshall  Lerner  condition  states  that  a  depreciation  /  devaluation  of  the  exchange  rate  will  lead  to  a  
net  improvement  in  the  trade  balance  provided  that  the  sum  of  the  price  elasticity  of  demand  for  exports  
and  imports  >  1.  
   
Page  125     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
Will  fall  in  
Sum  of  price  
Ped  for  exports   Ped  for  imports   currency  improve  
  elasticity    
the  trade  balance?  
Country  A   0.4   0.3   0.7   No  
Country  B   1.2   0.7   1.9   Yes  
Will  leave  it  
Country  C   0.8   0.2   1.0  
unchanged  
 
 
The  Sterling  Exchange  Rate  and  UK  Exports  &  Imports  
This  chart  tracks  the  value  of  the  sterling  exchange  rate  index  together  with  an  index  of  the  volume  of  
exports  and  imports  of  goods  and  services.    A  fall  in  the  sterling  exchange  rate  index  is  called  a  depreciation  
and  means  that  a  currency  will  buy  less  of  other  currencies  in  the  markets.  
 
Sterling exchange rate index,
2005 = 100 Sterling   Exports  (RHS)   Imports  (RHS)  

130   160  

120   140  

110   120  

100   100  

90   80  

80   60  

70   40  

60   20  
2003   2004   2005   2006   2007   2008   2009   2010   2011   2012   2013   2014   2015  

   
Evaluation  points  on  the  effects  of  exchange  rate  changes  
Changes  in  the  exchange  rate  have  quite  a  powerful  effect  on  the  economy  but  we  tend  to  assume  ceteris  
paribus  –  all  other  factors  held  constant  –  which  of  course  is  highly  unlikely  to  be  the  case  
1. Counter-­‐balancing  use  of  fiscal  and  monetary  policy:  For  example  the  government  can  alter  fiscal  
policy  to  manage  aggregate  demand  
2. Time  lags  –  it  takes  time  for  demand  for  exports  and  imports  to  change  following  a  movement  in  
the  currency.  Businesses  need  to  have  the  capacity  and  access  to  credit  to  expand  their  production.  
3. Low  price  elasticity  of  demand:  In  the  short  term,  the  effects  of  exchange  rates  on  export  and  
import  demand  tends  to  be  low  because  of  low  price  elasticity  of  demand  

Page  126     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
4. Business  response  to  the  challenge  of  a  high  exchange  rate:  Businesses  adapt  to  a  high  exchange  
rate.  There  are  several  ways  in  which  industries  can  adjust  to  the  competitive  pressures  that  a  
strong  pound  imposes.  Some  of  the  options  include:  
• Cutting  their  export  prices  when  selling  in  overseas  markets  and  therefore  accepting  lower  profit  
margins  to  maintain  competitiveness  and  market  share  
• Out-­‐sourcing  components  from  overseas  to  keep  production  costs  down  
• Seeking  productivity  /  efficiency  gains  to  keep  unit  labour  costs  under  control  or  perhaps  trying  to  
negotiate  a  reduction  in  pay  levels  
• Investing  extra  resources  in  new  product  lines  where  demand  is  price  inelastic  and  less  sensitive  to  
exchange  rate  fluctuations.  This  involves  producing  products  with  a  higher  income  elasticity  of  
demand,  where  non-­‐price  factors  such  as  product  quality,  design  and  effective  marketing  are  as  
important  in  securing  orders  as  the  actual  price  

Currency  appreciation  using  AD  and  AS  analysis  diagrams  

Currency  appreciation  and  the  demand  for  imports  –  explaining  the  process  

Rise  in  external  


purchasing  power  
Cheaper  to  import  goods  
Appreciaton  of  currency   •  £1  buys  more  Euros/S   and  services  

Rising  demand  for  imports   Worsening  of  the  trade   Fall  in  aggregate  demand  
balance  
•  Depends  on  elastcity  of   •  Because  of  rising  
demand  for  imports   •  Trade  deficit  may  rise   leakages  from  circular  
flow  

 
Page  127     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
24.Fiscal  Policy  
Introduction  to  Fiscal  Policy  
• Fiscal  policy  involves  using  government  spending,  taxation  and  borrowing  to  affect  the  level  and  
growth  of  aggregate  demand,  output  and  jobs  
• Fiscal  policy  is  also  used  to  change  the  pattern  of  spending  on  goods  and  services  
• It  is  also  a  way  of  redistributing  income  &  wealth,  for  example  by  changing  different  tax  rates  on  
varying  levels  of  income  or  wealth  
• It  can  be  used  as  an  instrument  of  micro-­‐economic  government  intervention  to  correct  for  free-­‐
market  failures  such  as  pollution  or  the  sub-­‐optimal  provision  of  public  and  merit  goods    
• Changes  in  fiscal  policy  affect  aggregate  demand  (AD)  and  aggregate  supply  (AS)  
• Fiscal  policy  also  concerns  how  much  a  government  must  borrow  to  finance  their  spending.  
Fiscal  Policy  Economics  –  Some  Key  Terms  
 

Bond  Yield   The  rate  of  interest  paid  on  government  debt  

The  budget  deficit  is  the  difference  between  what  the  government  receives  
Budget  (Fiscal)  Deficit  
in  revenue  and  what  it  spends  
The  size  of  the  deficit  is  influenced  by  the  state  of  the  economy:  in  a  boom,  
Cyclical  Fiscal  Deficit   tax  receipts  are  relatively  high  and  spending  on  unemployment  benefit  is  
low  
Taxes  on  income,  profits  and  wealth,  paid  directly  by  the  bearer  to  the  tax  
Direct  Taxation  
authorities.  
Taxation  and  spending  measures  that  allow  the  government  to  guide  the  
Fiscal  Policy  
economy.  

Taxes  on  expenditure  (e.g.  VAT).  They  are  paid  to  the  tax  authorities,  not  by  
Indirect  Taxation  
the  consumer,  but  indirectly  by  the  suppliers  of  the  goods  or  services.  

Debt  is  the  total  amount  owed  by  the  government  that  has  accumulated  
National  Debt  
over  the  years.    
The  structural  deficit  is  that  part  of  the  deficit  which  is  not  related  to  the  
Structural  Fiscal  Deficit   state  of  the  economy.    This  part  of  the  deficit  will  not  disappear  when  the  
economy  recovers.  
 
The  Public  and  the  Private  Sector  of  the  Economy  
• Public  sector  businesses  are  owned  and  operated  by  the  government  
• The  public  sector  is  not  profit-­‐driven,  while  this  is  usually  the  case  with  the  private  sector.  
• In  September  2013,  there  were  5.7  million  people  working  in  the  UK  public  sector  (18.8%  of  people  
in  employment).  The  National  Health  Service  (NHS)  employs  over  1.5  million  people  
• Public  sector  businesses  /  corporations  include  the  following:  
•     Met  Office  and  Ordnance  Survey  
•     Channel  4,  National  Nuclear  Laboratories  
•     Eurostar,  NATS  (National  Air-­‐Traffic  Control  Services)  
•     Network  Rail  (not  for  profit  business  that  operates  the  UK  rail  network)  
•     Royal  Mail  was  part  privatised  in  2013  (the  UK  Govt  currently  retains  a  30%  stake)  
Page  128     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
 
Overview  of  key  roles  for  fiscal  policy  
Fiscal  policy  decisions  impact  on  millions  of  consumers  and  businesses  in  the  short  and  the  long  term  
   

Financing  government   Changing  final  income   Providing  a  welfare  


spending   and  wealth   state  safety-­‐net  

Managing  the   Improving  long  run   Tackle  important  


economic  cycle   compettveness     market  failures  
 
 
Fiscal  Policy  and  Aggregate  Demand  
• Traditionally  fiscal  policy  has  been  seen  as  an  instrument  of  demand  management.    
• This  means  that  changes  in  government  spending,  direct  and  indirect  taxation  and  the  budget  
balance  can  be  used  “counter-­‐cyclically”  to  help  smooth  out  some  of  the  volatility  of  national  
output  particularly  when  the  economy  has  experienced  an  external  shock  and  is  in  a  recession.  
Keynesian  and  Monetarist  Views  
• The  Keynesian  school  argues  that  fiscal  policy  can  have  powerful  effects  on  aggregate  demand,  
output  and  employment  when  the  economy  is  operating  below  full  capacity  national  output,  and  
where  there  is  a  need  to  provide  a  demand-­‐stimulus.    
• Monetarist  economists  believe  that  government  spending  and  tax  changes  only  have  a  temporary  
effect  on  aggregate  demand,  output  and  jobs  and  that  the  tools  of  monetary  policy  are  a  m ore  
effective  instrument  in  controlling  inflation  and  maintaining  macroeconomic  stability  
 
 
   

Page  129     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Government  Spending  and  Tax  Revenue  in  the  UK  
 

Revenue   Spending  

850  

800  
Revenue  /  Spending  in  billion  pounds  

750  

700  

650  

600  

550  

500  
2010   2011   2012   2013   2014   2015*   2016*   2017*   2018*   2019*   2020*  
 
Source:  International  Monetary  Fund,  data  from  2015  onwards  is  a  forecast  
   
How  Fiscal  Policy  Works  -­‐  The  Transmission  Mechanism  
The  next  flow-­‐chart  identifies  some  of  the  channels  involved  with  the  fiscal  policy  transmission  mechanism  
–  in  the  example  shown  we  focus  on  an  expansionary  fiscal  policy  designed  to  boost  demand  and  output  
 

Cut  in  personal   Boost  to  disposable   Adds  to  consumer  


income  tax  rates   income   demand  

Cut  in  indirect  taxes   Lower  prices  –  leads   Adds  to  consumer  
e.g.  VAT   to  higher  real   demand  
Expansionary  Fiscal   incomes  
Policy  

Cut  in  corporation   Higher  “post  tax”   Adds  to  business  capital  
tax   profits  for  businesses   spending  

Cut  in  tax  on  interest   Boost  to  disposable   Adds  to  consumer  
from  saving   income  of  p eople  with   demand  
net  savings  
 
 
The  multiplier  effects  of  an  expansionary  fiscal  policy  depend  on  how  much  spare  productive  capacity  the  
economy  has;  how  much  of  any  increase  in  disposable  income  is  spent  rather  than  saved  or  spent  on  
imports.  And  also  the  effects  of  fiscal  policy  on  variables  such  as  interest  rates  and  the  exchange  rate.  
 

Page  130     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
A  contractionary  fiscal  policy  (commonly  known  as  fiscal  austerity)  would  involve  one  or  more  of  the  
following:  
• A  cut  in  government  expenditure  either  in  real  terms  or  as  a  share  of  GDP  
• An  increase  in  direct  and/or  indirect  taxes  
• An  attempt  to  reduce  the  size  of  the  budget  deficit  
 
Government  spending  
Spending  by  the  public  sector  can  be  broken  down  into:  
1. Transfer  Payments:      
a. These  are  welfare  payments  made  available  through  the  social  security  system  including  
the  Jobseekers’  Allowance,  Child  Benefit,  State  Pension,  Student  Grants,  Housing  Benefit,  
Income  Support  and  the  Working  Families  Tax  Credit  
b. The  main  aim  of  transfer  payments  is  to  provide  a  basic  floor  of  income  or  minimum  
standard  of  living  for  low-­‐income  households.  And  they  allow  the  government  to  change  
the  final  distribution  of  income.    
2. Current  Government  Spending:  i.e.  spending  on  state-­‐provided  goods  &  services  that  are  provided  
on  a  recurrent  basis  -­‐  for  example  salaries  paid  to  people  working  in  the  NHS  and  resources  for  
state  education  and  defence.  The  NHS  is  the  country’s  biggest  employer  with  over  one  million  
people  working  within  the  system!  Current  spending  is  also  known  as  resource  spending  
3. Capital  Spending:  Capital  spending  includes  infrastructure  spending  such  as  new  motorways  and  
roads,  hi-­‐speed  rail  projects,  hospitals,  schools  and  prisons.  It  also  includes  military  equipment,  
buildings  or  land.  Public  sector  investment  spending  adds  to  the  economy’s  capital  stock  and  can  
have  important  demand  and  supply  side  effects  in  the  long  term.    
 
Breakdown  of  government  spending  in  the  UK  
Government  spending  is  spending  on  goods  and  services  such  as  education,  health  care  and  defence  
 

 
 

Page  131     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Welfare  protection  is  the  largest  single  element  of  government  spending,  with  the  NHS  and  Education  the  
biggest  single  departmental  items.  
• Total  UK  government  spending  is  forecast  to  be  £745  billion  in  2015    
• This  is  43.1%  of  GDP.  £50  billion  or  7%  will  be  on  capital  spending  
• Spending  on  public  services  such  as  education  &  health  is  22%  of  GDP  

Transfer  Payments   Recurring  spending     Investment  Projects  


Welfare  Spending   Public  Services   State  Investment  

 
Government  Current  and  Capital  Spending  
 
Current  spending  is  on  providing  public  services  

Salaries  of  NHS   Drugs  used  in  health   Road  maintenance   Army  logistcs  
employees   care   supplies  

Capital  spending  –  new  public  infrastructure  


 

Constructon  of  new   New  equipment  in   Flood  defence   Extra  defence  
motorways   the  NHS   schemes   equipment  
 
 
What  are  the  Justifications  for  Government  Spending?  
1. To  provide  a  socially  efficient  level  of  public  goods  and  merit  goods  and  overcome  market  failure  
a. Public  goods  and  merit  goods  tend  to  be  under-­‐provided  by  the  private  sector  
b. Improved  and  affordable  access  to  education,  health,  housing  and  other  public  services  can  
help  to  improve  human  capital,  raise  productivity  and  generate  gains  for  society  as  a  whole  

Page  132     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
2. To  provide  a  safety-­‐net  system  of  welfare  benefits  to  supplement  the  incomes  of  the  poorest  in  
society  –  this  is  also  part  of  the  process  of  redistributing  income  and  wealth.  Government  
spending  has  an  important  role  to  play  in  controlling  /  reducing  the  level  of  relative  poverty  
3. To  provide  necessary  infrastructure  via  capital  spending  on  transport,  education  and  health  
facilities  –  an  important  component  of  a  country’s  long  run  aggregate  supply  
4. Government  spending  can  be  used  to  manage  the  level  and  growth  of  AD  to  meet  macroeconomic  
policy  objectives  such  as  low  inflation  and  higher  levels  of  employment  
5. Government  spending  can  be  justified  as  a  way  of  promoting  equity.    
6. Well-­‐targeted  and  high  value  for  money  public  spending  is  also  a  catalyst  for  improving  economic  
efficiency  and  competitiveness  e.g.  from  infrastructure  projects  
 
Welfare  spending  by  the  UK  Government  
 
£  Billion  per  year     2014-­‐15   2015-­‐16   2016-­‐17  
Welfare  capped  spending              
Department  of  Work  and  Pensions  (DWP)  social  security   74.4   76.0   74.8  
of  which:              
Housing  benefit  (not  on  JSA)   21.4   22.1   21.9  
Disability  living  allowance  and  personal  independence  payments   15.3   15.6   15.1  
Incapacity  benefits   14.1   14.8   14.7  
Winter  fuel  payments   2.1   2.1   2.1  
Personal  tax  credits   29.7   29.5   25.3  
Child  benefit   11.6   11.5   11.4  
Tax  free  childcare   0.0   0.0   0.1  
Total  welfare  cap   119.1   120.6   115.2  
Welfare  spending  outside  the  welfare  cap              
DWP  social  security  spending   92.0   94.0   96.1  
of  which:              
State  pension   86.5   89.7   92.1  
Jobseeker's  allowance   3.1   2.2   2.3  
Housing  benefit  (on  JSA)   2.4   1.6   1.7  
Total  welfare  outside  the  welfare  cap   95.1   96.4   98.6  
Total  welfare   214.3   216.9   213.8  
 
   

Page  133     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Taxation  
• Direct  taxation  is  levied  on  income,  wealth  and  profit.  Direct  taxes  include  income  tax,  inheritance  
tax,  national  insurance  contributions,  capital  gains  tax,  and  corporation  tax.    
• Indirect  taxes  are  taxes  on  spending  –  such  as  excise  duties  on  fuel,  cigarettes  and  alcohol  and  
Value  Added  Tax  on  many  different  goods  and  services  
 
What  are  the  main  sources  of  tax  revenues  for  the  UK  government?  

 
Direct  taxes  
• Direct  taxation  is  levied  on  income,  wealth  and  profit  
• Direct  taxes  include  income  tax,  inheritance  tax  and  corporation  tax  
• The  burden  of  a  direct  tax  cannot  be  passed  on  
Indirect  taxes  
• Indirect  taxes  are  taxes  on  spending  
• Examples  of  indirect  taxes  include  excise  duties  on  fuel,  cigarettes  and  alcohol  and  Value  Added  Tax  
(VAT)  on  many  different  goods  and  services  
• Producers  may  pass  on  an  indirect  tax  –  depending  on  price  elasticity  of  demand  and  supply  
 Progressive,  proportional  and  regressive  taxes  and  the  distribution  of  income  
• With  a  progressive  tax,  the  marginal  rate  of  tax  rises  as  income  rises.  I.e.  as  people  earn  more  
income,  the  rate  of  tax  on  each  extra  pound  goes  up.  This  causes  a  rise  in  the  average  rate  of  tax  
• With  a  proportional  tax,  the  marginal  rate  of  tax  is  constant.  National  insurance  contributions  are  
the  closest  example  in  the  UK  of  a  proportional  tax,  although  low-­‐income  earners  do  not  pay  NICs  
below  an  income  threshold  
• With  a  regressive  tax,  the  rate  of  tax  falls  as  incomes  rise  –  I.e.  the  average  rate  of  tax  is  lower  for  
people  of  higher  incomes.  In  the  UK,  regressive  taxes  come  from  excise  duties  of  items  of  spending  
such  as  cigarettes  and  alcohol.  Indirect  taxes  form  a  larger  percentage  of  the  disposable  income  of  
those  who  earn  less,  even  though  they  may  also  spend  less  

Page  134     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Income  Tax  
Income  tax  in  the  UK  is  progressive  
1. Most  people  have  a  tax  free  personal  allowance  
2. Basic  rate  of  income  tax  =  20%  
3. Higher  rate  of  income  tax  =  40%  
As  income  rises,  the  rate  of  tax  rises  so  that  people  on  the  highest  incomes  will  pay  a  higher  percentage  of  
their  income  to  the  government.    
 
Corporation  Tax  
• This  is  a  tax  on  business  profits.    
• There  is  a  tax  free  allowance  for  businesses  making  low  annual  profits  
Value  Added  Tax  (VAT)  
• Value  Added  Tax  (VAT)  is  a  tax  that's  charged  on  most  goods  and  services  that  VAT-­‐registered  
businesses  provide  in  the  UK.  It's  also  charged  on  goods  and  some  services  that  are  imported  from  
countries  outside  the  European  Union  (EU),  and  brought  into  the  UK  from  other  EU  countries  
• There  are  three  rates  of  VAT  
• Standard  -­‐  20  per  cent  
• Reduced  -­‐  5  per  cent  i.e.  energy  bills  
• Zero  -­‐  0  per  cent  (i.e.  exempt)  including  children’s  clothes,  congestion  charge,  doctor’s  fees  
 
Percentage  of  gross  income  taken  up  by  different  taxes  in  the  UK  in  2013-­‐14  

Lowest  20%   Highest  20%   All  


2nd  Quintile   3rd  Quintile   4th  Quintile  
  of  Income   of  Income   households  
Income  Tax   2.5   4.4   8.2   11.2   16.9   11.8  
Value  Added  
11.0   7.9   7.7   7.0   5.5   6.8  
Tax  (VAT)  
Duty  on  
1.5   1.0   1.0   0.9   0.7   0.9  
alcohol  
Duty  on  
2.8   1.7   1.3   0.6   0.3   0.8  
tobacco  
All  indirect  
28.1   19.1   17.8   15.3   11.3   15.3  
taxes  
 
• Income  tax  is  progressive  –  the  average  burden  of  income  tax  rises  across  income  groups.    
• Duties  on  tobacco  and  alcohol  are  regressive  
Original  and  Final  Income  –  Redistribution  in  the  UK  
• The  tax  and  welfare  benefit  system  helps  to  redistribute  income  so  that  the  distribution  of  final  
income  (after  taxes  and  benefits)  is  less  unequal  than  for  original  incomes.  
• The  UK  tax  and  welfare  system  is  mildly  progressive  because  it  leads  to  a  smaller  gap  between  
households  when  final  income  is  measured  

Page  135     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
The effects of direct and indirect taxes and welfare benefits on household income by
quintile groups, 2013/14
£ per week Original income Final income
1800
1600
1400
1200
1000
800
600
400
200
0
1 2 3 4 5 All households
Disposable income quintile  
Benefits  in  Kind  
Benefits  in  kind  include  the  estimated  value  to  households  of  consuming  services  such  as  state  education  
and  the  National  Health  Service  
 
Summary of the effects of taxes and benefits on all households, 2013/14
£ per week
400
300
200
100
0
-100
-200
-300
-400
-500
-600 Indirect taxes Direct taxes Benefits in kind Cash benefits Net position
-700
1 2 3 (median) 4 5 All households
Disposable income quintile
 
 
Automatic  Stabilisers  and  Discretionary  Changes  in  Fiscal  Policy  
• Discretionary  fiscal  changes  are  deliberate  changes  in  direct  and  indirect  taxation  and  govt  
spending  –  for  example,  increased  capital  spending  on  roads  or  more  resources  going  into  the  NHS.  
• Automatic  stabilisers  are  changes  in  tax  revenues  and  government  spending  that  come  about  
automatically  as  an  economy  moves  through  the  business  cycle  

Page  136     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
1. Tax  revenues:  When  the  economy  is  expanding  rapidly  the  amount  of  tax  revenue  increases  which  
takes  money  out  of  the  circular  flow  of  income  and  spending  
2. Welfare  spending:  A  growing  economy  means  that  the  government  does  not  have  to  spend  as  
much  on  means-­‐tested  welfare  benefits  such  as  income  support  and  unemployment  benefits  
3. Budget  balance  and  the  circular  flow:  A  fast-­‐growing  economy  tends  to  lead  to  a  net  outflow  of  
money  from  the  circular  flow.  Conversely  during  a  slowdown  or  a  recession,  the  government  
normally  ends  up  running  a  larger  budget  deficit  During  a  recession,  revenue  is  likely  to  be  lower  
due  to  less  income  earned,  less  profits  made  and  fewer  goods  being  bought  and  at  the  same  time  
government  expenditure  on  transfer  payments  e.g.  income  support  and  unemployment  benefit  
 
Fiscal  Policy  and  Aggregate  Supply  
 

Work  incentves  /  actve   Inward  migraton  of  key   Capital  investment  e.g.  
labour  supply   workers   FDI  projects  

Enterprise  /   Taxaton  and  incentves   Tariffs    affect  import  


Entrepreneurship   to  study   costs    
 
• Fiscal  policy  can  have  important  effects  on  the  supply-­‐side  of  the  economy.    
• Indeed  many  fiscal  decisions  are  made  with  improving  the  supply-­‐side  in  mind.    
1. Labour  market  incentives:  
a. Changes  in  income  tax  can  improve  incentives  for  people  to  actively  look  for  work  
b. Lower  taxes  might  also  have  a  positive  effect  on  work  effort  and  labour  productivity  
c. Cuts  to  national  insurance  contributions  might  help  to  expand  the  active  labour  supply  
d. Some  economists  argue  that  welfare  benefit  reforms  are  more  important  than  tax  cuts  in  
improving  incentives  –  to  create  a  gap  between  the  incomes  of  people  in  a  job  and  the  
unemployed.  Some  people  favour  a  move  towards  targeted  benefits  where  the  transfer  
payment  is  linked  to  participation  in  employment  schemes  or  community  work  
2. Capital  spending:  
a. Spending  on  infrastructure  (e.g.  improvements  to  a  motorway  network)  helps  provide  the  
capacity  needed  for  other  businesses  to  flourish.  
b. Lower  rates  of  corporation  tax  might  attract  inward  investment  from  overseas.  

Page  137     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
3. Entrepreneurship  and  investment:    
a. Government  spending  can  be  used  to  fund  an  expansion  in  new  small  business  start-­‐ups  
4. Research  and  development  and  innovation:    
a. Government  spending,  tax  credits  and  other  tax  allowances  could  be  used  to  encourage  
research  and  development  to  improve  competitiveness  and  contribute  to  a  faster  pace  of  
innovation  and  invention  
b. A  key  aim  going  forward  is  to  use  tax  incentives  to  stimulate  an  increase  in  investment  in  
low  carbon  technologies  to  promote  green  growth  
5. Human  capital  of  the  workforce:    
a. Spending  on  education  and  increased  investment  in  health  and  transport  can  also  have  
important  supply-­‐side  effects  in  the  long  run  
b. Government  spending  on  apprenticeships  can  help  to  improve  human  capital,  
employability  and  productivity  
 
The  Free  Market  Agenda  
• Free  market  economists  are  sceptical  of  the  effects  of  government  spending  in  improving  the  
supply-­‐side  of  the  economy  
• They  argue  that  lower  taxation  and  tight  control  of  government  spending  and  borrowing  is  
required  to  allow  the  private  sector  of  the  economy  to  flourish  
• They  believe  in  a  smaller  sized  state  sector  so  that  in  the  long  run,  the  overall  burden  of  taxation  
can  come  down  and  thus  allow  the  private  sector  of  the  economy  to  grow  and  flourish.  
Tax  competition  between  countries  
• Changes  in  business  taxation  are  now  regarded  as  an  important  form  of  supply-­‐side  policy.  
• Tax  competition  happens  when  a  national  government  uses  reforms  to  the  tax  system  as  a  supply-­‐
side  strategy  to  attract  investment  and  jobs  into  their  economy.  
• Some  countries  have  introduced  a  flat  tax  system,  examples  include  Russia,  Estonia  and  Poland  
• Is  tax  competition  between  countries  a  fair  way  of  bidding  for  investment?  
Examples  of  countries  with  flat  tax  systems  
 
Income  Tax   Lowest  and  Highest  Rate  the  same  (%)  

Russia   13%  
Ukraine   17%  
Mongolia   10%  
Costa  Rica   15%  
 
Differences  in  business  profits  (corporation)  tax  
 
Business  Profits  Tax  (Corporation  Tax)   Standard  rate  (%)  

Macedonia   15%  
Hong  Kong   17.5%  
Bahrain   0%  
Macao   12%  
 
Page  138     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
Evaluating  the  Arguments  for  a  Low  Tax  Economy  
   
Case  for  lower  tax  burdens  (tax  revenues  as  a  share  of  GDP)  
• Stimulates  work  incentives  and  productivity  
• Helps  to  create  more  jobs  because  businesses  have  less  tax  to  pay  
• Encourages  an  inflow  of  FDI  from  businesses  looking  for  low  tax  country  
• Incentivizes  enterprise  and  start-­‐ups  –  a  source  of  long  term  wealth  and  jobs  
• Lower  tax  rates  might  end  up  increasing  total  tax  revenues    
 
Counter-­‐arguments  to  the  low-­‐tax  economy  
• Taxation  is  a  key  instrument  for  changing  the  final  distribution  of  income  and  wealth.  It  is  equitable  
for  those  with  the  greatest  resources  to  pay  more  
• Tax  cuts  don’t  necessarily  lead  to  an  increase  in  total  tax  revenues  for  the  government  
• Consider  the  relative  economic  success  of  countries  such  as  Denmark,  Norway  and  Sweden  who  all  
have  higher  tax  burdens  and  progressive  tax  and  welfare  systems  
• Taxes  are  needed  to  fund  high  quality  public  services  such  as  education  and  health  which  benefit  
millions  of  people  in  the  long  run  
 
Economics  of  a  Budget  (Fiscal)  Deficit  
• When  the  government  is  running  a  budget  deficit  it  means  that  in  a  given  year,  total  government  
expenditure  exceeds  total  tax  revenue  
• If  the  government  is  running  a  budget  deficit,  it  has  to  borrow  this  money  through  the  issue  of  debt  
such  as  Treasury  bills  and  bonds  
• Most  of  the  government  debt  is  bought  up  by  financial  institutions  but  individuals  can  buy  bonds,  
premium  bonds  and  buy  national  savings  certificates  
• The  budget  balance  is  the  annual  difference  between  tax  revenues  and  government  spending  
• Gross  government  debt  is  total  debt  owed  by  the  government  –  also  known  as  the  national  debt  
UK  Budget  Balance  (Actual  and  Forecast)  
 
0.0%  
-­‐0.31%  
-­‐0.57%   -­‐0.33%  
-­‐2.0%   -­‐1.52%  
Budget  balance  to  GDP  rato  

-­‐3.08%  
-­‐4.0%  

-­‐4.78%  
-­‐6.0%  
-­‐5.74%   -­‐5.69%  

-­‐8.0%   -­‐7.64%   -­‐7.78%  

-­‐10.0%   -­‐9.67%  

-­‐12.0%  
2010   2011   2012   2013   2014   2015*   2016*   2017*   2018*   2019*   2020*  
 
 
Page  139     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
Does  the  size  of  a  budget  deficit  matter  for  the  economy?    
A  persistently  large  budget  deficit  can  be  a  problem:  
1. Financing  a  deficit:    

a. If  the  budget  deficit  rises  to  a  high  level,  the  government  may  have  to  offer  higher  interest  
rates  to  attract  sufficient  buyers  of  debt.    

b. This  raises  the  possibility  of  the  government  falling  into  a  debt  trap  where  it  must  borrow  
more  to  repay  the  interest  on  accumulated  borrowing.    

c. Many  high  debt  countries  in  the  European  Union  have  suffered  from  this  in  recent  years  –  
high  profile  examples  have  included  Ireland,  Greece,  Spain  and  Portugal.  

2. A  government  debt  mountain:    

a. Annual  budget  deficits  over  a  number  of  years  will  cause  the  total  amount  of  unpaid  
government  debt  to  climb.    

b. There  is  an  opportunity  cost  involved  because  interest  payments  on  bonds  might  be  used  
in  more  productive  ways,  for  example  on  health  services  or  extra  investment  in  education.  
Every  0.05%  saved  on  £220bn  of  new  debt  pays  one  year’s  salary  for  46,000  teachers.    

c. Higher  public  sector  debt  also  represents  a  transfer  of  income  from  people  and  businesses  
that  pay  taxes  to  those  who  hold  government  debt  and  cause  a  redistribution  of  income  
and  wealth  in  the  economy.    

3. Crowding-­‐out:    

a. If  a  larger  budget  deficit  leads  to  higher  interest  rates  and  taxation  in  the  medium  term  and  
thereby  has  a  negative  effect  on  growth  in  consumption  and  investment  spending,  then  a  
process  of  ‘fiscal  crowding-­‐out’  is  occurring  

b. The  Institute  of  Fiscal  Studies  has  estimated  that  reducing  the  UK  budget  deficit  over  the  
next  five  years  will  require  every  person  in  the  UK  to  pay  £1250  of  extra  taxes  each  year.  

4. Risk  of  capital  flight:    

a. Some  economists  believe  that  high  borrowing  risks  causing  a  ’run  on  a  domestic  currency’.  
This  is  because  the  government  may  find  it  difficult  to  find  sufficient  buyers  of  its  debt  and  
the  credit-­‐rating  agencies  may  decide  to  reduce  the  rating  on  a  nation’s  sovereign  debt  

The  difference  between  government  borrowing  and  government  debt  


• Government  borrowing:  
o Public  sector  borrowing  is  the  amount  borrowed  each  year  to  finance  spending  
• National  debt  
o Public  sector  debt  is  a  measure  of  the  accumulated  national  debt  owed  by  the  government  
   

Page  140     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Countries  with  Highest  Government  Debt  in  2015  
   

Public  (government)  debt  as  a  percentage  of  GDP  


0.0%   50.0%   100.0%   150.0%   200.0%   250.0%   300.0%  

Japan   246.14%  
Greece   172.73%  
Italy   133.76%  
Jamaica   132.82%  
Lebanon   131.82%  
Enritrea   129.24%  
Portugal   126.35%  
Cape  Verde   121.08%  
Bhutan   115.89%  
Ireland   107.75%  
Grenada   107.11%  
Antgua  and  Barbuda   106.91%  
Belgium   106.57%  
Cyprus   105.67%  
United  States   105.06%  
 
 
Countries  with  the  Lowest  Government  Debt  in  2015  
 

Natonal  (government)  debt  measured  as  a  percentage  of  GDP,  Source:  IMF  
0.0%   2.0%   4.0%   6.0%   8.0%   10.0%   12.0%   14.0%   16.0%   18.0%  

Saudi  Arabia   1.82%  


Brunei  Darussalam   3.28%  
Hong  Kong  SAR   6.37%  
Uzbekistan   8.32%  
Oman   8.56%  
Kiribat   8.87%  
Kuwait   9.46%  
Estonia   10.13%  
Nigeria   11.48%  
Iran   11.88%  
Botswana   12.73%  
Solomon  Islands   13.62%  
Algeria   13.64%  
United  Arab  Emirates   14.75%  
Chile   16.25%  
 
 
UK  government  debt  is  forecast  to  reach  90%  of  GDP  in  2015.  This  is  lower  than  the  average  of  advanced    
(OECD)  economies.    
   
Page  141     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
Government  Debt  for  a  selection  of  EU  Countries  
 
2006   2008   2010   2012   2015  
   
France   %  of  GDP   81.9   87.7   103.5   113.4   127.5  
Germany   %  of  GDP   64.1   61.2   67.4   65.1   60.0  
Greece   %  of  GDP   103.4   109.4   145.7   156.8   186.0  
Ireland   %  of  GDP   44.1   84.4   280.3   334.0   316.0  
Italy   %  of  GDP   116.2   114.5   126.0   138.1   144.9  
Spain   %  of  GDP   45.7   47.1   66.7   91.0   118.6  
United  Kingdom   %  of  GDP   42.5   51.8   76.4   85.8   90.0  
 
Potential  benefits  of  a  budget  deficit  
1. Government  borrowing  can  benefit  growth:    

a. A  budget  deficit  can  have  positive  macroeconomic  effects  if  it  is  used  to  finance  capital  
spending  that  leads  to  an  increase  in  the  stock  of  national  assets  

b. For  example,  spending  on  transport  infrastructure  improves  the  supply-­‐side  capacity  and  
productivity  of  the  economy  

c. Improved  provision  of  public  goods  can  create  positive  externalities    (social  benefits)  

2. The  budget  deficit  as  a  tool  of  demand  management:    

a. Keynesian  economists  support  borrowing  as  a  way  of  managing  aggregate  demand  

b. An  increase  in  borrowing  can  be  a  useful  stimulus  to  demand  when  other  sectors  of  the  
economy  are  suffering  from  weak  or  falling  spending  

c. A  change  in  the  government  budget  deficit  may  lead  to  a  more  than  proportional  change  in  
aggregate  demand  –  this  is  known  as  the  (positive)  fiscal  multiplier  effect.  

National  Debt  for  the  UK  measured  as  a  percentage  of  GDP  
 
100.0%  

90.0%  

80.0%  
Natonal  debt  to  GDP  rato  

70.0%  

60.0%  

50.0%  

40.0%  

30.0%  

20.0%  

10.0%  

0.0%  
2010   2011   2012   2013   2014   2015*   2016*   2017*   2018*   2019*   2020*  
 
 
Page  142     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
UK  Government’s  Fiscal  Austerity  Policies  
The  UK  government  has  a    b  with  the  emphasis  on  cutting  government  spending  in  some  areas  in  real  terms  
and  a  series  of  direct  and  indirect  tax  increases:  
 
Key  policies  for  deficit  reduction:  
• Rise  in  standard  rate  of  VAT  to  20%  
• Rise  in  employee  national  insurance  contributions  (11%)  
• Deep  cuts  in  real  government  spending  e.g.  for  local  authorities  
• Welfare  caps  including  £26k  pa  cap  on  welfare  for  each  family  
Some  taxes  have  been  cut  
• A  series  of  cuts  to  corporation  tax  (main  rate  is  now  20%)  
• Freezing  of  fuel  duties  (meaning  a  cut  in  real  terms)  
• Increases  in  the  real  value  of  the  income  tax  free  allowance  
• Cuts  in  employer  national  insurance  for  long  term  unemployed  
• Freezing  of  council  tax  (so  that  council  tax  falls  in  real  terms)  
The  Government  has  been  helped  by  lower  interest  rates  on  newly  issued  debt  as  a  result  of  quantitative  
easing  and  by  the  decisions  of  the  Bank  of  England  to  keep  monetary  policy  interest  rates  at  just  0.5%  since  
March  2009.  It  is  easier  for  the  government  to  introduce  fiscal  austerity  at  a  time  when  the  economy  is  
growing  and  when  monetary  policy  remains  supportive  of  a  higher  level  of  aggregate  demand.  
   
UK  Government’s  New  Fiscal  Rule  (2015)  
• In  the  July  2015  Budget,  the  Chancellor  George  Osborne  announced  a  new  fiscal  rule.  
• The  government’s  fiscal  rules  now  include  a  target  for  a  budget  surplus  by  2019/20  and  for  all  
subsequent  years  when  in  ‘normal  times’.    
• The  economy  will  be  viewed  as  being  in  ‘normal  times’  if  real  annual  growth  is  above  1%  
Countries  running  budget  (fiscal)  surpluses  in  2015  
 

Public  surplus  in  relaton  to  GDP  


0.0%   2.0%   4.0%   6.0%   8.0%   10.0%   12.0%  
Timor-­‐Leste   9.72%  
Norway   7.3%  
Kuwait   6.2%  
Qatar   5.62%  
Hong  Kong  SAR   3.15%  
Micronesia   2.83%  
Marshall  Islands   2.36%  
Palau   1.69%  
Republic  of  Congo   1.58%  
Singapore   1.46%  
St.  Kiws  and  Nevis   1.4%  
Seychelles   1.21%  
Nepal   1.12%  
Botswana   0.68%  
Korea   0.34%  
 
   
Page  143     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
25.Supply-­‐side  Policies  
 
What  are  supply-­‐side  policies?  
• Supply-­‐side  policies  are  policies  aimed  at  making  markets  and  industries  operate  more  efficiently  
and  contribute  to  a  faster  underlying-­‐rate  of  growth  of  real  national  output  
• Successful  policies  shift  the  LRAS  curve  to  the  right  leading  to  a  rise  in  potential  output  
• Most  governments  believe  that  improved  supply-­‐side  performance  is  the  key  to  achieving  
sustained  growth  without  causing  a  rise  in  inflation.    
• There  must  also  be  a  high  enough  level  of  aggregate  demand  so  that  the  productive  capacity  of  an  
economy  is  actually  brought  into  play.  
• Supply-­‐side  policies  can  be  implemented  by  both  the  public  and/or  the  private  sector  
Supply-­‐side  objectives  
Key  concepts  to  focus  on  are  incentives,  enterprise,  technology,  mobility,  flexibility  and  efficiency.  
1. Improve  incentives  to  look  for  work  and  invest  in  people’s  skills  
2. Increase  labour  and  capital  productivity  
3. Increase  occupational  and  geographical  mobility  of  labour  to  help  reduce  the  rate  of  
unemployment  
4. Increase  investment  and  research  and  development  spending  
5. Promoting  more  competition  and  stimulate  a  faster  pace  of  invention  and  innovation  to  improve  
competitiveness  
6. Provide  a  platform  for  sustained  non-­‐inflationary  growth  
7. Encourage  the  start-­‐up  of  new  businesses  /  enterprises  especially  those  with  export  potential  
8. Improve  the  trend  rate  of  growth  of  real  GDP  
Key  Supply-­‐Side  Challenges  for  the  UK  Economy  

Low  trend  growth  rate   Rise  of  Emerging   Low  capital   Rising  inequality  /  
of  real  GDP   Natons   investment  &  research   relatve  poverty  

Persistent   High  rates  of  youth   Deep  and  widening   Structural  trade  
Productvity  Gap   unemployment   regional  economic   deficit  (current  
divide   account  of  BoP)  

 
   

Page  144     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
UK  Government  Growth  Objectives  
The  government  has  4  aims  to  help  the  economy  to  grow:  to  create  the  most  competitive  tax  system  in  the  
G20;  to  make  the  UK  the  best  place  in  Europe  to  start,  finance  and  grow  a  business;  to  encourage  
investment  and  exports  as  a  route  to  a  more  balanced  economy;  and  to  create  a  more  educated  workforce  
that  is  the  most  flexible  in  Europe  
 
Market-­‐based  supply-­‐side  policies  
1. Cutting  government  spending  and  borrowing  
2. Lower  business  taxes  to  stimulate  investment  and  lower  income  taxes  to  improve  work  
incentives  
3. Reducing  red-­‐tape  to  cut  the  costs  of  doing  business  
4. Measures  to  improve  the  flexibility  of  the  labour  market  /  reforming  employment  laws  
5. Policies  to  boost  competition  such  as  deregulation  and  anti-­‐monopoly  and  anti-­‐cartel  laws  
6. Privatisation  of  state  assets  (selling  off  public  sector  businesses  into  the  private  sector)  
7. Opening  up  an  economy  to  overseas  trade  and  investment  
8. Opening  up  an  economy  to  inward  labour  migration  
Interventionist  policies  
1. State  has  key  role  in  investing  in  public  services  and  building  critical  infrastructure  
2. Tax  incentives  and  welfare  reforms  can  encourage  more  people  into  work  
3. A  commitment  to  a  fair  minimum  wage    /  living  wage  to  improve  work  incentives  
4. Active  regional  policy  to  boost  under-­‐performing  areas  /  areas  of  high  unemployment  
5. Some  case  for  selective  import  controls  to  allow  domestic  industries  to  expand  
6. Management  of  the  exchange  rate  to  improve  competitiveness  of  export  industries  
7. Nationalisation  of  some  key  industries  
8. Stronger  regulation  of  industries  
There  are  two  main  approaches  to  the  supply-­‐side.    
1. Firstly  policies  focused  on  product  markets  where  goods  and  services  are  sold  to  consumers  and    
2. Secondly  the  labour  market  –  a  factor  market  where  labour  is  bought  and  sold  
Product  Market  Reforms  
• Product  markets  refer  to  markets  in  which  all  kinds  of  goods  and  services  are  made  and  traded,  for  
example  the  market  for  airline  travel;  smart-­‐watches,  new  cars;  pharmaceutical  products  and  the  
markets  for  financial  services  such  as  banking,  mortgages  and  pensions.    
• Supply-­‐side  policies  in  product  markets  are  designed  to  increase  competition  and  efficiency  
Privatisation    
• Over  the  last  thirty,  many  former  state-­‐owned  businesses  have  been  privatised  –  i.e.  transferred  
from  the  public  to  private  sector.    
• Examples  in  Britain  include  British  Gas,  British  Telecom,  British  Airways,  British  Steel,  British  
Aerospace,  regional  water  companies,  electricity  generators  and  distributors,  and  the  Royal  Mail  
• Privatization  is  designed  to  break-­‐up  state  monopolies  and  create  more  competition.  The  
government  also  created  utility  regulators  such  as  OFCOM  and  OFWAT  who  have  in  the  past  
imposed  price  controls  and  who  are  now  in  charge  of  over-­‐seeing  moves  towards  competitive  
markets  in  areas  such  as  gas  and  electricity  supply  and  telecommunications.  
   

Page  145     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Deregulation  of  Markets  
• De-­‐regulation  or  liberalisation  means  the  opening  up  of  markets  to  greater  competition  
• The  aim  of  this  is  to  expand  market  supply  (driving  prices  down)  and  increase  choice  for  
consumers  
• Good  examples  of  deregulation  to  use  include:  urban  bus  transport,  post  and  parcel  delivery  
service,  telecommunications,  and  gas  and  electricity  supply.  
Toughening  up  of  Competition  Policy  
• Most  supply-­‐side  economists  believe  that  competition  forces  business  to  become  more  efficient  in  
the  way  in  which  they  use  scarce  resources.  
• A  tougher  competition  policy  regime  includes  policies  designed  to  curb  anti-­‐competitive  practices  
such  as  price-­‐fixing  cartels  and  other  abuses  of  a  dominant  market  position  –  in  other  words  –  
intervention  to  curb  some  of  the  market  failure  that  can  come  from  monopoly  power  
 
A  commitment  to  free  (open)  trade  
• Trade  between  nations  creates  competition  and  should  be  a  catalyst  for  improvements  in  costs  and  
lower  prices  for  consumers  
• The  UK  is  committed  to  an  expansion  of  free  trade  within  the  European  Union  Single  Market  and  
also  negotiating  a  liberalisation  of  trade  in  the  global  economy  through  the  World  Trade  
Organisation.    
Measures  to  encourage  small  business  start-­‐ups  /  entrepreneurship  
• The  small  businesses  of  today  often  become  the  larger  businesses  of  tomorrow  employing  more  
workers  and  contributing  to  innovation  that  can  have  positive  spill  over  effects  in  other  industries.    
• Governments  of  all  political  persuasions  argue  that  they  want  to  promote  an  entrepreneurial  
culture  and  to  increase  the  rate  of  new  business  start-­‐ups.    
• Supply  side  policies  include  loan  guarantees  for  new  businesses;  regional  policy  assistance  for  
entrepreneurs  in  depressed  areas  of  the  country;  advice  for  new  firms    
Capital  investment  and  innovation:    
• Capital  spending  by  firms  adds  to  aggregate  demand  and  also  has  an  important  effect  on  long  run  
aggregate  supply.    
• Tax  relief  on  research  and  development  and  reductions  in  the  rate  of  corporation  tax  
• A  key  policy  for  the  Coalition  has  been  the  creation  of  24  new  Enterprise  Zones  that  offer  lower  
taxes  and  easier  planning  laws  for  businesses  in  designated  areas  supported  by  a  Regional  Growth  
Fund  
• Raising  investment  is  a  key  ingredient  in  helping  labour  productivity  to  grow.    
Supply  Side  Policies  for  the  Labour  Market  
• These  policies  are  designed  to  improve  the  quality  and  quantity  of  the  supply  of  labour  
• They  seek  to  make  the  British  labour  market  more  flexible  so  that  it  is  better  able  to  match  the  
labour  force  to  the  changing  demands  placed  upon  it  by  employers  helping  to  cut  structural  
unemployment.    
• An  expansion  in  the  labour  supply  increases  the  productive  potential  of  an  economy.      

Page  146     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
• That  expansion  in  the  supply  of  people  willing  and  able  to  work  can  come  from  several  sources  for  
example:  encouraging  older  people  to  stay  in  the  work  force,  a  relaxed  approach  to  labour  
migration  and  measures  to  get  non-­‐working  parents  to  actively  look  for  work.  
The  UK  labour  market  is  one  that  has  to  contend  with  a  wide  range  of  problems  many  of  which  are  related  
to  persistently  high  rates  of  unemployment.  Some  of  these  weaknesses  are  mentioned  in  the  graphic  
below.  Supply  side  labour  market  reforms  are  designed  to  improve  the  employment  prospects  for  workers  
of  different  ages,  in  different  occupations  and  industries  and  in  different  regions  of  the  country.  
 
A  Selection  of  Structural  Weaknesses  in  the  UK  Labour  Market  
 

Labour  
Immobility  

Limited  
Apprentceship   Work  
Disincentves  
Supply  

High  Economic  
Inactvity   Skills  Gaps  

High  Youth   Long  Term  


Unemployment   Unemployed  
 
 
Trade  Union  Reforms  
• Many  of  the  traditional  legal  protections  enjoyed  by  the  trade  unions  have  been  taken  away  –  
including  restrictions  on  their  ability  to  take  industrial  action.  The  result  has  been  a  decrease  in  
strike  action  in  virtually  every  industry  and  an  improvement  in  industrial  relations  in  the  UK  
• Improved  partnerships  between  trade  unions  and  employers  can  make  a  big  contribution  to  raising  
productivity  and  improving  the  flexibility  of  workers  in  their  jobs    
   

Page  147     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Public  and  private  sector  membership  of  trade  unions  in  the  UK  labour  market  
 

Private  sector   Public  sector  

4500  

4000  
Number  of  members  (in  thousands)  

3500  

3000  

2500  

2000  

1500  

1000  

500  

0  
1995  1996  1997  1998  1999  2000  2001  2002  2003  2004  2005  2006  2007  2008  2009  2010  2011  2012  2013  
 
 
Trade  union  density:    
Percentage  of  employees  that  were  members  of  a  trade  union  in  the  United  Kingdom  from  1995  to  2013  
 
34.0%
32.4%

31.4%
32.0%
30.7%
29.9%29.7%29.8%
30.0% 29.3% 29.3%
28.8% 28.8%28.6%
Percentage of employees

28.3%
28%
27.4%27.4%
28.0%
26.6%
26% 26%
25.6%
26.0%

24.0%

22.0%

20.0%
1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013
 
 
Increased  Spending  on  Education  and  Training  
1. The  economic  returns  from  extra  education  spending  vary  according  to  the  stage  of  development  
2. Government  spending  on  education  and  training  improves  workers’  human  capital  

Page  148     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
3. Most  economists  agree,  with  the  move  away  from  industries  that  require  manual  skills  to  those  
that  need  mental  skills,  investment  in  education,  and  the  retraining  of  manual  workers,  is  vital.    
4. Improved  training,  especially  for  those  who  lose  their  job  in  an  old  industry  should  improve  the  
occupational  mobility  of  workers.  This  should  reduce  the  problem  of  structural  unemployment  
5. A  well-­‐educated  workforce  acts  as  a  magnet  for  foreign  investment  in  the  economy.    
Income  Tax  Reforms  and  the  Incentive  to  Work  
• Economists  who  support  supply-­‐side  policies  believe  that  lower  income  tax  improve  incentives  for  
people  to  work  longer  hours  or  take  a  new  job  –  because  they  keep  more  of  the  money  they  earn.  
• Cutting  tax  rates  for  lower  paid  workers  may  help  to  reduce  the  ‘unemployment  trap’  –  where  
people  may  be  no  better  off  from  working  than  if  they  stay  outside  the  labour  force.  
• Do  lower  taxes  always  help  to  increase  the  active  labour  supply  in  the  economy?  Some  people  may  
choose  to  work  the  same  number  of  hours  and  simply  take  a  rise  in  their  post-­‐tax  income!  Millions  
of  other  workers  have  little  choice  over  the  hours  that  they  work.      
Showing  the  effects  of  supply-­‐side  improvements  
• Supply-­‐side  factors  help  to  explain  why  some  countries  grow  faster  than  others  
• With  globalisation,  improving  competitiveness  is  vital  in  achieving  success  in  world  markets.    
• A  rising  share  of  GDP  in  most  countries  is  devoted  to  international  trade      
• Markets  are  becoming  more  competitive  and  those  countries  whose  supply-­‐side  lets  those  down  
can  find  a  rising  level  of  import  penetration  and  a  weak  export  performance.    
Recent  UK  Government  Supply-­‐Side  Policies  

Privatsaton  of  Royal   Patent  Box  Incentve   Modern   Welfare  Caps  /  and  
Mail  (2013)   Apprentceships  –  e.g.   other  Welfare  Benefit  
the  Youth  Contract   Reforms  

Shale  Gas  Tax  Cut   Large  Fall  in   UK  Natonal   Launch  of  a  Green  
Incentves   Corporaton  Tax      -­‐   Infrastructure  Plan   Investment  Bank  
main  rate  now  19%   including  HS2  
 

Page  149     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
 
 
Research  and  Development  (R&D)  
• Spending  on  research  and  development  (R&D)  in  the  UK  has  remained  low  as  a  %  of  GDP  –  usually  
between  1.5  and  2%  of  national  income  
• This  ‘research  gap’  is  a  constraint  on  innovation  and  affects  global  competitiveness  
• Only  two  British  firms  are  in  the  top  50  global  research  spenders.    
• Other  countries  e.g.  Finland,  Germany  and  Israel  devote  higher  share  of  GDP  to  research  
• The  biggest  barriers  to  innovation  are  risk  aversion,  uncertainty  about  ability  to  exploit  research  
and  make  a  profit,  a  lack  of  high-­‐skilled  workers  and  a  lack  of  information  on  technology  and  
markets  
• There  is  some  evidence  of  higher  R&D  spending  in  the  UK  among  smaller  businesses  in  computing  
technology,  biotechnology  and  nanotechnology  
• The  top  EU  companies  for  research  are  Nokia,  Volkswagen,  Bosch  and  Siemens  
• Siemens  holds  about  53,300  patents,  and  filed  8,600  in  2011  –  just  under  40  per  working  day  
• The  top  two  UK  firms  are  GlaxoSmithKline  and  AstraZeneca  
• The  British  government  has  tried  to  boost  R&D  spending  through  tax  credits  but  critics  say  that  this  
policy  has  been  ineffective.  Recently  the  government  has  introduced  an  incentive  known  as  a  
Patent  Box  –  where  profits  from  research  projects  are  taxed  at  a  lower  rate  
• Research  is  important  for  supply-­‐side  competitiveness  but  a  key  evaluation  point  is  that  the  level  of  
research  spending  is  not  necessarily  a  guide  to  the  pace  and  success  of  innovation  in  a  country.    
• Many  businesses  do  not  patent  their  most  innovative  ideas,  preferring  to  keep  them  as  trade  
secrets  
• Steve  Jobs  once  said,  “Innovation  has  nothing  to  do  with  how  many  R&D  dollars  you  have.  When  
Apple  came  up  with  the  Mac,  IBM  was  spending  at  least  100  times  more  on  R&D.”  
 
   

Page  150     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Unemployment  rate  in  the  United  Kingdom  from  April  2015  to  June  2015,  by  region/country  
 

LFS  Unemployment  rate,  per  cent  of  labour  force  


0.0%   1.0%   2.0%   3.0%   4.0%   5.0%   6.0%   7.0%   8.0%   9.0%  
North  East   8.1%  
London   6.7%  
Yorkshire  and  The  Humber   6.5%  
Northern  Ireland   6.5%  
North  West   6%  
West  Midlands   6%  
Wales   5.9%  
Scotland   5.6%  
United  Kingdom   5.6%  
East  Midlands   4.7%  
East  of  England   4.7%  
South  East   4.5%  
South  West   4.4%  
 
 
Regional  Policy  –  The  Northern  Powerhouse  Project  
• The  UK  government  wants  more  regional  balance  to  help  supply-­‐side  potential  growth  
• The  main  goal  of  Northern  Powerhouse  idea  is  to  have  a  balanced  regional  recovery  
• The  North  has  a  relatively  higher  concentration  of  public  sector  and  manufacturing  jobs  and  has  
grown  less  quickly  since  the  end  of  the  last  recession  
• The  North  suffers  from  higher  levels  of  long  term  unemployment  
• The  key  aim  is  to  increase  growth  in  major  cities  including  Liverpool,  Manchester,  Leeds  and  Hull  
• Policy  options  include:  
1. Investment  to  improve  transport  connections    
2. Supporting  science  and  innovation  including  the  universities  
3. Backing  clusters  of  businesses  such  as  life  sciences  and  marine  engineering  
International  Competitiveness  
Competitiveness  is  the  ability  of  an  economy  to  compete  fairly  and  successfully  in  markets  for  
internationally  traded  goods  and  services  that  allows  for  rising  standards  of  living  over  time.  
o Cost  competitiveness  –  differences  in  unit  costs  between  producers  –  reflected  in  prices  
o Non-­‐price  competitiveness  –  involving  technical  factors  such  as  product  quality,  design,  reliability  
and  performance,  after-­‐sales  services,  marketing,  branding  and  availability  of  replacement  parts  
Unit  labour  (wage)  costs  
• These  are  the  labour  costs  of  supplying  goods  and  services  per  unit  of  output    
• Unit  labour  costs  are  determined  by  
o The  costs  of  employing  people  (wage  rates,  salaries,  payroll  taxes)  
o The  productivity  of  these  people    
• Data  on  unit  labour  costs  is  normally  expressed  in  relative  terms  i.e.  we  compare  unit  labour  costs  
in  one  country  relative  to  another  
• Unit  labour  costs  will  rise  when  wages  rise  faster  than  the  annual  improvement  in  productivity  

Page  151     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Non-­‐Wage  Costs  
The  main  non-­‐wage  costs  for  businesses  include:  
• The  costs  of  meeting  environmental  regulationsand  environmental  taxes  
• Employment  protection  laws  and  health  and  safety  laws  
• Requirements  to  provide  business  pensions  
World  Economic  Forum  –  Global  Competitiveness  Report  
This  is  a  report  published  annually  and  is  an  attempt  to  rank  countries  using  a  group  of  indicators  including:  
• Institutions  (property  rights  protection,  trust,  judicial  independence,  corruption)  
• Infrastructure  (transport,  telephony,  and  energy,  ports)  
• Macroeconomic  environment  (including  stability  of  key  macro  indicators)  
• Health  and  primary  education,  Higher  education  and  training  
• Financial  markets  (including  stability  of  markets,  strength  of  banks)  
• Technological  readiness  (readiness  to  exploit,  adapt  to  new  technologies)  and  innovation  
• Market  size  (linked  to  population  size  and  per  capita  incomes)  
• Business  sophistication  (quality  of  supply  chains,  industrial  clusters,  quality  of  management)  
Top  100:  Ranking  of  countries  according  to  general  quality  of  infrastructure  in  2014  
 

Index  (1  =  underdeveloped,  7  =  extensively  by  internatonal  standards)  


0   1   2   3   4   5   6   7  
Switzerland   6.6  
Hong  Kong  SAR   6.5  
United  Arab  Emirates   6.4  
Finland   6.4  
Singapore   6.3  
Netherlands   6.3  
Austria   6.2  
Iceland   6.2  
Japan   6.2  
France   6.1  
Germany   6  
Portugal   6  
Spain   5.9  
Luxembourg   5.9  
Denmark   5.8  
 
 
UK  ranking  in  global  competitiveness:  The  UK  was  ranked  9th  in  2014  
Strengths  included:    
• Efficiency  of  its  labour  market  (7th)  
• Sophisticated  (8th)  and  innovative  (13th)  businesses  
• A  large  consumer  market  (it  is  ranked  6th  for  market  size)  
Weaknesses  included:  
• Macroeconomic  environment  (85th)  
• Large  fiscal  deficit  (placing  the  country  138th)  and  high  public  debt  (77  percent  of  GDP,  120th)  
• Comparatively  low  national  savings  rate  (12.3  percent  of  GDP  in  2010,  119th)  

Page  152     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Ranking  of  the  10  countries  who  filed  the  most  international  patent  applications  in  2014  
 

Number  of  applicatons  


0   10000   20000   30000   40000   50000   60000   70000  

United  States   61,492  

Japan   42,459  

China   25,539  

Germany   18,008  

Republic  of  Korea   13,151  

France   8,319  

UK   5,282  

Netherlands   4,218  

Switzerland   4,115  

Sweden   3,925  
 
 
Policies  to  improve  international  competitiveness  of  the  UK  economy  
 

Improving  funckoning  of  Labour  Markets  


• Investment  in  all  levels  of  educaton  and  training  
• Encouraging  inward  migraton  of  skilled  workers    
• Improvements  in  management  quality  

Infrastructure  Investment  
• Bewer  motorways,  ports,  hi-­‐speed  rail  
• Northern  Powerhouse  project    
• Communicatons  e.g.  super-­‐fast  broadband,  4G  networks  

Supporkng  Enterprise  /  Entrepreneurship  


• Improved  access  to  business  finance  e.g.  for  start-­‐ups  
• Incentves  for  business  innovaton  and  inventon  
• Reductons  in  business  red  tape  

Macroeconomic  Stability  
• Maintaining  low  inflaton  /  price  stability  
• A  sustainable  and  more  compettve  banking  system    
• A  compettve  exchange  rate  v  major  trading  partners  
 
 

Page  153     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Supply-­‐Side  Investment:  Shale  Gas  and  the  UK  Economy  
 
Will  successful  exploration  and  extraction  of  
shale  gas  provide  a  crucial  kick-­‐start  to  UK   The  Bowland  Shale  Gas  Area  
economic  growth  and  help  lower  the  price  of  
fuels  whilst  increasing  the  UK's  energy  security?  
Suddenly  the  opportunities  and  risks  of  
investing  in  shale  gas  have  become  hot  topics.  
Fracking  has  produced  a  glut  of  natural  gas  in  
the  USA  and  pushed  down  the  price  to  the  
benefit  of  households  and  industry  -­‐  could  it  do  
the  same  in  the  UK?  
 
Background  on  the  shale  gas  sector  
• The  UK  has  been  a  net  importer  of  gas  
since  2004  
• North  sea  oil  production  is  also  on  a  long  term  declining  trend  
• ‘Shale  gas’  is  found  within  shale  beds  -­‐  Gas  is  accessed  through  a  technique  called  “fracking”    
• Fracking  involves  injecting  water,  sand  and  chemicals  under  pressure  into  dense  shale  rock  to  
release  the  oil  and  gas  trapped  inside,  
• Potentially  recoverable  resources  of  shale  gas  in  the  UK  are  highly  uncertain  but  the  British  
Geological  Survey  has  recently  confirmed  that  the  UK  has  substantial  onshore  shale  gas  reserves.  
• The  largest  business  involved  in  shale  gas  at  the  moment  is  Cuadrilla  Resources  
• Recovery  rates  for  shale  gas  are  low  -­‐  around  15-­‐30%  of  original  gas  in  place  
• The  overhead  costs  of  exploration  are  high,  a  single  test  well  operation  costs  around  £10  million  
• In  2000,  shale  represented  just  two  per  cent  of  US  natural  gas  supply.  By  2012  it  was  37  per  cent.  
Last  year,  the  surge  in  output  helped  to  push  the  US  gas  price  to  10-­‐year  lows.  
For  shale  extraction  
1. Supporters  of  fracking  claim  that  investment  will  bring  down  the  cost  of  energy  bills,  create  jobs  in  
Britain  and  bring  money  to  local  neighbourhoods.  For  example,  shale  gas  companies  have  agreed  
to  pay  £100,000  to  communities  near  wells,  plus  1  per  cent  of  revenue  if  gas  is  extracted.    
2. Lower  energy  bills  will  help  to  make  British  businesses  more  competitive  in  global  markets  
3. Reduced  gas  prices  would  help  to  reduce  fuel  poverty  concentrated  among  low-­‐income  families    
Opposing  arguments  
1. Opponents  of  fracking  are  deeply  concerned  about  the  carbon  footprint  and  climate  risks  
associated  with  the  extraction  and  use  of  shale  gas  including  possible  ground  and  surface  water  
contamination  
2. Shale  gas  fracking  is  also  highly  water  intensive  at  a  time  when  water  scarcity  is  becoming  an  
important  economic  and  environmental  issue.  
Competitive  advantage  and  human  capital  issues  
Britain  has  decades  of  experience  and  expertise  in  offshore  oil  and  gas  exploration  and  extraction  but  it  
remains  to  be  seen  whether  the  same  human  capital  will  be  as  effective  in  on-­‐shore  fracking.  Another  
related  question  concerns  the  possible  impact  of  shale  gas  on  the  cost  of  electricity  generated  at  gas-­‐fired  
power  plants  and  how  will  it  compare  to  other  forms  of  generation  including  coal,  nuclear  and  renewable  
sources.  
 

Page  154     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
26.Keynesian  Economics  
• An  understanding  of  Keynesian  ideas  can  be  
helpful  in  evaluating  macro  policies  and  the  search  
for  macroeconomic  stability  in  terms  of  prices,  
jobs,  incomes  and  profits  
• Keynesian  economics  focuses  on  psychology,  
uncertainty  and  expectations  in  driving  
macroeconomic  decisions.  In  Keynesian  economics,  
the  state  of  animal  spirits  is  vital.  
 
 
Keynesian  economists  and  free  markets   John  Maynard  Keynes  was  born  on  5  
  June  1 883.  He  was  educated  at  Eton  
Keynesian  economists  believe  that  free  markets  are  volatile   College  and  at  Cambridge  University  -­‐  
and  not  self-­‐correcting.   where  he  later  taught.  He  died  on  21  
April  1946    
• Free  market  volatility:  
o The  free-­‐market  system  is  naturally  prone  
to  periods  of  recession  &  depression  
o The  volatility  of  aggregate  demand  can  be  explained  by  changes  in  consumer  and  business  
sentiment  –  also  known  as  animal  spirits.  
o In  a  world  of  stagnation  or  depression  direct  intervention  in  the  economy  may  be  essential  
• Free  markets  are  not  always  self-­‐correcting:  
o When  a  recession  or  a  depression  occurs,  the  free  market  system  is  not  necessarily  self-­‐
correcting  –  indeed  en-­‐masse,  individuals  can  become  trapped  in  a  deflationary  depression  
which  is  in  no  one’s  interest  but  which,  left  on  our  own,  no  one  can  counter-­‐act.  
o Persistent  deflation  can  be  as  costly  as  high  inflation  –  it  can  be  damaging  especially  in  
economies  where  there  is  a  huge  level  of  private  &  public  sector  debt  
o You  cannot  always  rely  on  new  inventions  /  innovations  and  other  natural  stabilisers  to  
drag  an  economy  out  of  a  recession  
Savings  and  aggregate  demand  
• The  paradox  of  thrift  helps  to  explain  why  a  rise  in  precautionary  saving  (people  looking  for  
security)  can  lead  to  a  fall  in  demand  and  incomes  and  a  reduction  in  output,  income  and  wealth  
• Negative  multiplier  and  accelerator  effects  can  drag  production  and  employment  to  a  low  level  
where  it  can  stay  unless  there  is  some  external  stimulus  to  lift  demand  and  output  again  
• On  an  international  level,  when  the  global  desire  to  save  exceeds  the  global  willingness  to  invest  
the  result  is  a  contraction  in  demand  and  production  leading  to  a  fall  in  incomes  and  employment  
The  risks  of  a  deflationary  depression  
• Recession  (and  worse  –  a  depression)  represents  a  pure  waste  of  scarce  resources.  Unemployed  
workers  want  to  work,  and  businesses  want  to  use  their  productive  capacity  to  supply  goods  and  
services.  If  they  had  work,  the  things  they  produced  would  be  available  for  all  to  buy,  and  the  
incomes  they  received  would  enable  them  to  purchase  the  products  of  others.  Incomes  from  higher  
wages  and  stronger  profits  would  feed  through  the  circular  flow  in  the  standard  macro  model.  
• But  in  a  recession  a  country  can  experience  a  persistent  state  where  output  is  well  below  a  
country’s  capacity  to  produce  
• The  key  is  to  take  measures  to  lift  AD  and  bring  about  an  expansion  of  short-­‐run  aggregate  sup  
 
Page  155     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
The  Liquidity  Trap:  
• In  normal  circumstances  it  is  possible  to  boost  demand  by  cutting  interest  rates.  But  there  is  a  level  
below  which  interest  rates  cannot  go  (they  have  been  at  0.5%  in  the  UK  since  the  spring  of  2009  
and  at  low  levels  in  other  countries)  and  at  that  point  monetary  policy  may  become  powerless.    
• Moreover,  even  if  interest  rates  can  be  lowered  this  may  have  no  effect  if  people  cannot  or  will  not  
borrow.  This  is  known  as  the  liquidity  trap.  
• At  this  point,  aggregate  demand  can  only  be  boosted  by  the  Government  borrowing  more,  either  to  
spend  directly  or  to  give  to  others  via  tax  cuts  or  the  like.    
• In  other  words,  we  need  a  targeted  Keynesian  fiscal  stimulus.    
• Keynesians  believe  that  fiscal  multiplier  effect  is  higher  for  spending  than  it  is  for  tax  cuts.  
• The  aim  is  simple  –  when  private  sector  demand  for  goods  and  services  is  low,  the  government  
needs  to  find  a  compensating  source  of  demand  to  rebalance  the  economy      
The  Importance  of  Animal  Spirits  
• Keynes  coined  the  notion  of  animal  spirits  
• Animal  spirits  refers  to  a  broad  mix  of  confidence,  trust,  mood  and  expectations  and  animal  spirits  
can  fluctuate  very  quickly  as  populations  of  people  change  their  thinking  
• This  focus  on  animal  spirits  helps  to  explain  why  psychology  is  so  important  in  macroeconomics  
• When  animal  spirits  are  poor,  individuals  save  more,  businesses  save  more  too  and,  because  
demand  and  profits  are  lower  than  expected,  they  cut  back  on  production  and  perhaps  postpone  or  
cancel  capital  investment  projects.    
• Higher  saving  and  reduced  investment  both  have  the  effect  of  reducing  demand  and  incomes  in  the  
circular  flow  causing  an  economic  contraction  
Forecasted  Base  Interest  Rate  in  the  United  Kingdom  from  1st  quarter  2014  to  1st  quarter  2020  
 
2.5%  

2.0%  

1.5%  
Bank  rate  

1.0%  

0.5%  

0.0%  
2014  Q1  
2014  Q2  
2014  Q3  
2014  Q4  
2015  Q1  
2015  Q2  
2015  Q3  
2015  Q4  
2016  Q1  
2016  Q2  
2016  Q3  
2016  Q4  
2017  Q1  
2017  Q2  
2017  Q3  
2017  Q4  
2018  Q1  
2018  Q2  
2018  Q3  
2018  Q4  
2019  Q1  
2019  Q2  
2019  Q3  
2019  Q4  
2020  Q1  

 
Office  for  Budget  Responsibility;  July  8,  2015  
 
 

Page  156     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
27.Strengths  and  Weaknesses  of  Demand  Side  Policies  
• Demand  side  policies  focus  on  the  use  of  monetary  and  fiscal  policies  to  manage  the  level  and  rate  
of  growth  of  aggregate  demand  to  influence  macroeconomic  indicators  such  as  GDP  growth,  
unemployment,  inflation  and  the  balance  of  trade.  
• It  is  important  to  note  that  demand  and  supply-­‐side  policies  do  not  operate  in  isolation  
o Effective  demand-­‐side  policies  can  help  to  stimulate  aggregate  supply  
o Successful  supply-­‐side  policies  can  create  their  own  positive  effect  on  aggregate  demand  
Examples  of  demand  side  policies  during  an  economic  slowdown  /  recession  
Some  policies  used  to  counter  an  economic  slowdown  becoming  a  recession  are  shown  below  
 

Relax  credit  
rules  to   Cut  direct  and  
increase  bank   indirect  taxes  
lending  

Quanttatve   Increase  
easing  by  the   government  
central  bank   spending  

Depreciaton  of  
Lower  interest   Economic   the  exchange  
rates   Slowdown  
rate  

 
 
Questioning  the  effectiveness  of  these  demand  side  policies  
• Business  and  consumer  confidence  may  be  low  
• A  reduction  in  direct  tax  might  be  saved  rather  than  spent  
• Lower  interest  rates  might  not  stimulate  business  investment  if  confidence  is  low  
• Low  interest  elasticity  of  demand  
• Cuts  ininterest  rates  might  not  cause  higher  demand  if  people  have  low  confidence  
• If  very  low  interest  rates  are  ineffective,  this  is  called  a  liquidity  trap  
• Low  price  elasticity  of  demand  for  exports  
• Demand  for  exports  might  have  a  low  price  elasticity  of  demand  meaning  that  the  effect  of  
lower  export  prices  in  overseas  markets  will  be  relatively  small  
• Limits  to  how  much  a  government  can  borrow  
• One  option  to  expand  demand  if  for  the  government  to  increase  their  budget  deficit  either  
by  increases  in  government  spending  and/or  reductions  in  tax  
• But  a  rise  in  borrowing  might  lead  to  higher  interest  rates  (this  is  a  form  of  crowding  out)    
• And  there  are  doubts  about  the  size  of  the  fiscal  multiplier  effect.  I.e.  a  fiscal  stimulus  might  
only  have  a  modest  effect  on  aggregate  demand,  output  and  incomes  
• Real  interest  rates  
• Nominal  interest  rates  can  be  cut  close  to  zero,  but  if  there  is  deflation  in  an  economy,  then  
real  interest  rates  can  actually  rise  leading  to  a  contraction  of  aggregate  deman  
   

Page  157     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
28.Possible  Conflicts  between  Macro  Objectives  
 

Price  Stability   Growth  of  Real  GDP   Falling  Unemployment  /  


(CPI  Inflakon  of  2%)   (Nakonal  Output)   Raising  Employment  

Higher  Average  Living  


Standards  (nakonal  income   Stable  Balance  of  Payments   An  Equitable  Distribukon  of  
on  the  current  account   Income  and  Wealth  
per  capita)  
 
 
Possible  conflicts  between  macro  objectives  
• It  is  rare  for  a  country  to  achieve  all  of  its  main  macroeconomic  objectives  at  the  same  time  
• Frequently  conflicts  can  appear  between  the  different  aims  and  as  a  result,  choices  might  have  to  
be  made  about  which  objectives  are  to  be  given  greatest  priority.    
• This  will  vary  from  one  country  to  another  since  the  needs  of  different  nations  will  differ  according  
to  their  stage  of  economic  development.  

Unemployment  and  inflakon  (price  stability)   Economic  growth  and  inflakon  

Conflickng  Aims?  

Economic  growth  and  the  balance  of  


payments   Economic  Growth  and  Inequality  

 
1. Inflation  and  unemployment:  Falling  unemployment  might  create  demand-­‐pull  and  cost-­‐push  
inflationary  pressures  leading  to  a  fall  in  the  value  of  money  
2. Economic  growth  and  environmental  sustainability:  Rapid  growth  and  development  frequently  
puts  extra  pressure  on  scarce  resources  threatening  the  sustainability  of  future  living  standards  
3. Economic  growth  and  inflation  –  an  overheating  economy  may  suffer  accelerating  inflation  which  
then  has  negative  effects  on  trade  performance,  business  profits  and  jobs  

Page  158     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
4. Economic  growth  and  the  balance  of  payments:  Strong  GDP  growth  fuelled  by  high  levels  of  
consumer  demand  for  goods  and  services  might  lead  to  a  worsening  of  the  trade  balance.  This  is  
particularly  true  when  an  economy  has  a  high  marginal  propensity  to  import.  
 
Unemployment  and  inflation  –  the  Phillips  Curve  Concept  
• In  1958  AW  Phillips  plotted  95  years  of  data  of  UK  wage  inflation  against  unemployment  
• It  suggested  a  short-­‐run  trade-­‐off  between  unemployment  and  inflation  
• Falling  unemployment  might  cause  rising  inflation    
• If  a  Government  wanted  to  reduce  the  unemployment  rate,  it  could  increase  aggregate  demand  
but,  although  this  might  temporarily  increase  employment,  it  could  also  have  inflationary  effects  
The  key  to  understanding  this  trade-­‐off  is  to  consider  the  possible  inflationary  effects  in  both  labour  and  
product  markets  from  an  increase  in  national  income,  output  and  employment.  
• The  labour  market:  As  unemployment  falls,  labour  shortages  may  occur  where  skilled  labour  is  in  
short  supply.  This  puts  pressure  on  wages  to  increase  and  prices  may  rise  as  businesses  pass  on  
these  costs  to  their  customers.    
• Other  factor  markets:  Cost-­‐push  inflation  can  also  come  from  rising  demand  for  commodities  such  
as  oil,  copper  and  processed  manufactured  goods  such  as  steel,  concrete  and  glass.  When  an  
economy  is  booming,  so  does  the  derived  demand  for  components  and  raw  materials.  
• Product  markets:  Rising  demand  can  lead  to  suppliers  raising  prices  to  increase  their  profit  
margins.  The  risk  of  rising  prices  is  greatest  when  demand  is  out-­‐stripping  supply-­‐capacity  leading  
to  excess  demand  (i.e.  a  positive  output  gap.)  
 

 
 
The  possible  conflict  between  unemployment  and  inflation  can  be  moderated  if:  
1. The  economy  achieves  higher  labour  productivity  –  this  raises  efficiency,  reduces  the  unit  costs  of  
production  and  also  leads  to  higher  real  wages  which  boosts  consumer  demand  
2. Innovation  allows  businesses  to  produce  new  products  at  cheaper  costs  
3. Expectations  of  inflation  remain  stable  –  a  credible  inflation  target  can  help  here  

Page  159     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
4. Workers  are  prepared  to  accept  cuts  in  real  wages  to  keep  their  jobs  –  this  helps  to  lower  the  rate  
of  cost  push  inflation  and  can  help  to  limit  increases  in  unemployment  during  a  recession  
5. The  economy  is  sufficiently  flexible  to  cope  with  external  demand  and  supply-­‐side  shocks  such  as  
unexpectedly  volatility  in  the  prices  of  raw  materials  and  components.    
 
Unemployment  and  Inflation  Rates  in  the  UK  Economy  
 
The  data  in  the  table  below  shows  that  in  the  last  four  years,  both  inflation  and  unemployment  have  been  
been  falling  at  the  same  time.  The  economy  has  been  able  to  sustain  a  fall  in  the  rate  of  unemployment  
without  a  pick  up  in  inflationary  pressures.  There  are  a  number  of  factors  behind  this,  not  least  the  slow  
rate  of  growth  of  pay  for  people  in  the  labour  market  and  also  a  steep  fall  in  global  commodity  prices.  
 
Consumer  price   Unemployment  
Inflation   Unemployment  
  inflation  (%)   rate  (per  cent)  
2007   2.3   5.3  
   
2008   3.6   5.7   Rising   Rising  
2009   2.2   7.6   Falling   Rising  
2010   3.3   7.9   Rising   Rising  
2011   4.5   8.1   Rising   Rising  
2012   2.8   8.0   Falling   Falling  
2013   2.6   7.6   Falling   Falling  
2014   1.5   6.2   Falling   Falling  
2015  (June)   0.0   5.5   Falling   Falling  
 
Earnings  for  People  in  Work  –  Rate  of  Growth  of  Pay  
There  have  been  several  years  of  slow  pay  growth  since  2009  although  wage  inflation  is  now  accelerating  
again  with  pay  growing  more  quickly  than  prices.  
 
% change in earnings, latest 3 months on same period a year earlier
6

0
2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015
Mar Mar Mar Mar Mar Mar Mar Mar Mar Mar Mar Mar Mar Mar Mar
 
 
 

Page  160     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Economic  Growth  and  the  Balance  of  Payments  
• A  period  of  fast  growth  may  come  into  conflict  with  the  balance  of  payments.  Much  depends  on  
the  income  elasticity  of  demand  for  traded  goods  and  services  
• Say  for  example,  real  disposable  incomes  grow  by  3%  and  the  income  elasticity  for  imports  =  +2.5.  
That  would  lead  to  a  7%  rise  in  the  volume  of  imports.  Unless  there  is  a  corresponding  rise  in  
exports,  we  expect  to  see  a  worsening  of  the  balance  of  trade  (i.e.  a  widening  trade  deficit).    
UK  Economic  Growth  and  the  BoP  Current  Account  
The  data  in  the  table  shows  the  growth  of  real  national  output  and  the  current  account  balance.  Britain  has  
run  a  current  account  deficit  in  each  year,  the  size  of  the  deficit  during  the  economic  recovery.  
 
  Real  GDP  Growth   BoP  Current  Account  Balance  (%  of  
(%  Per  annum)   GDP)  
2007   2.6   -­‐2.7  
2008   -­‐0.3   -­‐3.7  
2009   -­‐4.3   -­‐2.8  
2010   1.9   -­‐2.6  
2011   1.6   -­‐1.7  
2012   0.7   -­‐3.7  
2013   1.7   -­‐4.5  
2014   3.0   -­‐5.5  
 
Policies  to  improve  the  trade  balance  at  a  time  of  economic  growth  
 

Supply-­‐Side  Policies  
•  Reforms  to  improve  labour  productvity  
•  Incentves  to  boost  research  &  development  &  innovaton  
•  Measures  to  increase  investment  in  export  sectors  

Exchange  Rate  Depreciakon  


•  A  depreciaton  of  the  currency  (in  theory)  makes  exports  more  price  
compettve  and  imports  are  more  expensive  
•  But  the  effects  are  dependent  on  price  elastcity  of  demand  

Sound  /  Effeckve  Macro  Economic  Policies  


•  Monetary  policy  to  help  keep  inflaton  low  relatve  to  the  inflaton  of  
major  trading  compettors  
•  Infrastructure  investment  to  increase  export  compettveness  

 
 
   

Page  161     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
29.AS  Macro  Glossary  
 
AAA  credit  rating   The  best  credit  rating  that  can  be  given  to  a  corporation's  or  a  government’s  bonds,  
effectively  indicating  that  the  risk  of  default  is  negligible  
Accelerator  effect   Where  planned  capital  investment  is  linked  positively  to  the  past  and  expected  
growth  of  consumer  demand  or  national  income  
Aggregate  supply   Either  an  inflation  shock  or  a  shock  to  potential  national  output;  adverse  aggregate  
shock   supply  shocks  of  both  types  reduce  output  and  can  increase  the  rate  of  inflation  
Animal  spirits   The  state  of  confidence  or  pessimism  held  by  consumers  and  businesses.    
Appreciation   A  rise  in  the  market  value  of  one  exchange  rate  against  another  
Austerity   Economic  policy  aimed  at  reducing  a  government's  deficit  (or  borrowing).  Austerity  
can  be  achieved  through  increases  in  government  revenues  -­‐  primarily  via  tax  rises  -­‐  
and/or  a  reduction  in  government  spending  or  future  spending  commitments.  
Automatic   Automatic  fiscal  changes  as  the  economy  moves  through  stages  of  the  business  cycle  
stabilisers   –  e.g.  a  fall  in  tax  revenues  from  the  circular  flow  in  a  recession.  
Bank  run   When  a  large  number  of  people  suspect  that  a  bank  may  go  bankrupt  and  withdraw  
their  deposits.  Bank  runs  are  rare,  one  happened  with  the  Northern  Rock  in  2007.  
Bond   Both  companies  and  governments  can  issue  bonds.  The  issue  of  new  government  
debt  is  done  by  the  central  bank  and  involves  selling  debt  to  capital  markets  
Brain  drain   The  movement  of  highly  skilled  people  from  their  own  country  to  another  nation  
BRIC  economies   The  BRIC  grouping  –  Brazil,  Russia,  India  and  China  –  short  hand  for  the  rise  of  
emerging  markets.  The  BRICs  have  a  bigger  share  of  world  trade  than  the  USA  
Bubble   When  the  prices  of  securities  or  other  assets  rise  so  sharply  and  at  such  a  sustained  
rate  that  they  exceed  valuations  justified  by  fundamentals,  making  a  sudden  collapse  
likely  (at  which  point  the  bubble  "bursts")  
Budget  deficit   Occurs  when  government  spending  is  greater  than  tax  revenues.  Reducing  the  deficit  
can  be  achieved  by  tax  increases  or  cuts  in  government  spending  or  a  period  of  
economic  growth  which  brings  about  a  rise  in  direct  and  indirect  tax  revenues  
Business   Expectations  about  the  future  of  the  economy  –  vital  in  influencing  business  decisions  
confidence   about  how  much  to  spend  on  new  capital  goods  
Capacity  utilisation   Measures  how  much  of  the  productive  potential  of  the  economy  is  being  used.  
Utilisation  falls  during  a  recession  leading  to  a  rise  in  spare  capacity  
Capital  market   A  stock  or  a  bond  market  where  firms  can  raise  money  for  investment  purposes  
Capital  stock   The  value  of  the  total  stock  of  capital  inputs  in  the  economy  
Capital-­‐labour   Replacing  workers  with  machines  in  a  bid  to  increase  productivity  and  reduce  the  unit  
substitution   cost  of  production.  This  can  lead  to  structural  unemployment  
Claimant  Count   The  number  of  people  claiming  unemployment-­‐related  benefits  
Closed  economy   An  economy  operating  without  imports  and  exports  –  i.e.  closed  to  global  trade  
Comparative   Comparative  advantage  refers  to  the  relative  advantage  that  one  country  or  producer  
advantage   has  over  another.  Countries  can  benefit  from  specializing  in  and  exporting  the  
product(s)  for  which  it  has  the  lowest  opportunity  cost  of  supply  
Constant  prices   Constant  prices  tells  us  that  the  data  has  been  inflation  adjusted  

Page  162     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Consumer   Expectations  about  the  future  including  interest  rates,  incomes  and  jobs  
confidence  
Consumer   Products  such  as  washing  machines  that  are  not  used  up  immediately  when  
durables   consumed  and  which  provide  a  flow  of  services  over  time  
Consumer  price   The  consumer  price  index  (CPI)  is  the  government's  preferred  measure  of  inflation  
index  
Corporation  Tax   A  tax  on  the  profits  made  by  companies  
Cost  push  inflation   An  increase  in  the  price  level  caused  by  a  sustained  increase  in  costs  of  production  
Credit  crunch   Where  banks  reduce  lending  due  to  falling  confidence  that  loans  will  be  repaid.    
Creeping  inflation   Small  rises  in  the  general  price  level  over  a  long  period  
Current  account   The  overall  balance  of  credits  minus  debits  for  trade  in  goods,  trade  in  services,  
investment  income  and  transfers  
Current  account   The  amount  by  which  money  relating  to  trade,  investment  etc  going  out  of  a  country  
deficit   is  more  than  the  amount  coming  in.  A  current  account  deficit  implies  a  net  fall  of  
demand  in  a  country’s  circular  flow  
Cyclical  trade   A  trade  deficit  that  arises  purely  due  to  changes  in  the  economy’s  cycle,  for  example  
deficit   many  countries  run  a  trade  deficit  when  their  economy  is  growing  strongly  
Cyclical   Unemployment  caused  by  a  lack  of  aggregate  demand  for  goods  and  services,  where  
unemployment   national  output  <  potential  output  leading  to  a  negative  output  gap  
Default   A  default  occurs  when  a  borrower  has  broken  the  terms  of  a  loan  or  other  debt,  for  
example  if  a  borrower  misses  a  payment  
Deflation   A  persistent  fall  in  the  general  price  level  of  goods  and  services  
Depreciation   A  fall  in  the  market  value  of  one  exchange  rate  against  another  
Depression   Used  to  describe  a  severe  recession  which  may  become  a  prolonged  downturn  in  the  
economy  and  where  a  nation’s  GDP  falls  by  at  least  10  per  cent  
Deregulation   Reducing  barriers  to  entry  in  order  to  make  a  market  more  competitive  
Discouraged   People  often  out  of  work  for  a  long  time  who  give  up  on  job  search  
workers  
Discretionary  fiscal   Deliberate  attempts  to  affect  aggregate  demand  using  changes  in  government  
policy   spending,  direct  and  indirect  taxation  and  borrowing  
Disposable  income   Gross  income  less  income  tax  and  national  insurance  contributions  plus  cash  welfare  
benefits.  Disposable  income  is  the  money  that  comes  into  a  household  from  various  
sources,  including  welfare  benefits  but  after  taxes  on  income  
Double  dip   When  an  economy  goes  into  recession  twice  without  a  full  recovery  in  between  
recession  
Dumping   When  a  producer  in  one  country  exports  a  product  to  another  at  a  price  below  the  
price  it  charges  in  its  home  market  or  below  the  costs  of  supply  
Economic  cycle   Variations  in  the  annual  rate  of  growth  of  an  economy  over  time  
Economic  growth   An  increase  in  the  real  value  of  goods  and  services  produced  in  a  country  or  area  as  
measured  by  the  annual  %  change  in  real  national  output.  Also  a  long-­‐run  increase  in  
a  country’s  productive  capacity.  
Economic  shocks   Unpredictable  events  such  as  volatile  prices  for  oil,  gas  and  foodstuffs  
Page  163     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
Economic  stability   When  growth,  prices  and  unemployment  do  not  change  much  from  year  to  year  
Economically   Those  who  are  unemployed  and  actively  seeking  new  job  
active  
Economically   Those  who  are  of  working  age  but  are  neither  in  work  nor  actively  seeking  work  
inactive  
Emerging  markets   The  financial  markets  of  developing  countries  
Exchange  rate   The  rate  at  which  one  currency  can  be  exchanged  for  another.  
Expansionary   A  relaxation  of  monetary  policy  means  an  attempt  to  use  an  expansionary  monetary  
monetary  policy   policy  to  boost  aggregate  demand,  output  and  jobs  –  includes  lower  interest  rates  
Expectations   How  we  expect  the  future  to  unfold    
Expenditure-­‐ Policies  that  are  designed  to  ‘switch’  expenditure  from  imports  to  domestically  
switching  policies   produced  goods  in  order  to  improve  the  balance  of  payments  and  stimulate  GDP  
Export  revenue   Sales  from  selling  goods  and  services  overseas,  an  injection  of  demand  
Financial  assets   For  consumers  the  main  financial  assets  are  property,  pensions,  equities,  unit  trusts  
and  cash  
Fine-­‐tuning   Changes  in  monetary  policy  or  fiscal  policy  designed  to  gradually  manage  the  level  of  
aggregate  demand  and  prices  e.g.  small  changes  in  policy  interest  rates  
Fiscal  austerity  or   Fiscal  austerity  refers  to  decisions  by  a  government  to  reduce  the  amount  of  
fiscal  tightening   government  borrowing  (i.e.  cut  the  size  of  a  fiscal  deficit)  over  a  period  of  years  
Fiscal  deficit   When  government  expenditure  is  higher  than  the  revenue  from  tax  recei  
Fiscal  policy   A  government's  policy  regarding  taxation  and  public  spending.  It  can  be  loose  (with  
the  emphasis  on  increased  spending  and  lower  tax  revenue  to  boost  economic  
activity,  with  the  acceptance  of  a  wider  fiscal  deficit)  or  tight  (with  the  emphasis  on  
cutting  spending  and  boosting  tax  revenue,  resulting  in  a  slower  economy  
Fiscal  stability   Many  governments  seek  to  maintain  a  degree  of  balance  between  tax  revenues  and  
public  sector  spending.  A  balanced  budget  is  one  in  which  spending  equal  revenue  
Fiscal  stimulus   Government  measures,  normally  involving  increased  public  spending  and  lower  direct  
and/or  indirect  taxation,  aimed  at  giving  a  positive  jolt  to  economic  activity  
Forecast   A  prediction  made  about  the  likely  future  performance  of  an  economy  
Foreign  direct   FDI  stands  for  Foreign  Direct  Investment.  FDI  is  investment  from  one  country  into  
investment   another  (normally  by  companies  rather  than  governments)  that  involves  establishing  
operations  or  acquiring  tangible  assets,  including  stakes  in  other  businesses  
Free  trade   When  trade  is  allowed  to  occur  without  any  form  of  restriction  such  as  a  tariff  
Full  capacity   A  level  of  national  output  where  all  available  factor  inputs  are  fully  employed  –  this  is  
output   a  factor  influencing  the  underlying  growth  rate  (LRAS)  
Full  employment   When  there  enough  job  vacancies  for  all  the  unemployed  to  take  work  
GDP   Gross  domestic  product  (GDP)  is  the  total  value  of  output  in  the  UK  and  is  used  to  
measure  change  in  economic  activity  
Gini  Coefficient   A  measure  of  the  extent  to  which  groups  of  households,  from  the  bottom  of  the  
income  distribution  upwards,  receive  less  than  an  equal  share  of  income.  
Globalisation   The  deepening  of  relationships  between  countries  of  the  world  reflected  in  an  
increasing  level  of  overseas  trade  and  investment  
Page  164     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
GNI   Gross  National  Income  –  income  generated  from  the  resources  owned  by  inhabitants  
and  businesses  of  a  given  country  
Government  debt   The  total  stock  of  unpaid  debt  issued  by  a  government.  A  government  will  normally  
borrow  money  by  issuing  bonds  or  other  securities  
Gross  Domestic   National  income  per  head  of  population,  a  baseline  measure  of  living  standards  
Product  per  capita  
Hard  landing   A  full-­‐scale  recession  shown  by  a  decline  in  real  national  output  
Hot  Money   Money  that  flows  freely  and  quickly  around  the  world  looking  to  earn  the  best  rate  of  
return.  It  might  be  invested  in  any  asset  whose  value  is  expected  to  rise  (e.g.  property  
or  shares)  or  placed  in  an  account  offering  the  best  real  rate  of  interest.  
Household  wealth   The  value  of  assets  –  including  property,  shares,  savings  and  pension  fund  assets  
Human  capital   Investment  in  education  and  training  to  increase  the  quality  of  the  labour  force  and  
to  make  people  more  flexible  in  a  changing  world  of  work  
Human   An  index  to  assess  comparative  levels  of  development  in  countries,  quantified  in  
Development   terms  of  literacy,  life  expectancy  and  purchasing  power  
Index  
Hysteresis   When  a  sustained  period  of  low  aggregate  demand  can  lead  to  permanent  damage  to  
the  supply  side  of  the  economy  
Immobility  of   Barriers  to  the  movement  of  people  between  areas  and  between  jobs  
labour  
Inflation   A  sustained  increase  in  the  general  price  level  for  goods  and  services  
Inflation   The  rate  of  increase  of  consumer  prices  expected  by  consumers.  Expectations  can  
expectations   influence  spending  and  saving  decisions.  
Inflation  target   The  Bank  of  England  has  a  CPI  inflation  target,  which  is  currently  2  per  cent  
Inflationary   Demand  and  supply-­‐side  pressures  that  can  cause  a  rise  in  the  general  price  level.  
pressures   Demand-­‐pull  inflationary  pressure  is  greatest  when  actual  GDP  exceeds  potential  GDP  
causing  a  positive  output  gap.  Cost-­‐push  inflationary  pressure  can  arise  from  
increases  in  unit  wage  costs,  rising  import  prices  and  an  increase  in  the  prices  of  raw  
materials,  fuel  and  components  used  in  production  
Infrastructure   The  transport  links,  communications  networks,  sewage  systems,  energy  plants  and  
other  facilities  essential  for  the  efficient  functioning  of  a  country  and  its  economy  
Innovation   Changes  to  products  or  production  processes  –  innovation  is  important  in  delivering  
improvements  in  dynamic  efficiency  and  generating  better  goods  and  services  
International   An  organisation  of  over  180  countries,  promoting  global  monetary  cooperation,  
Monetary  Fund   financial  stability,  international  trade,  employment  and  sustainable  economic  growth.  
(IMF)   It  has  provided  help  for  several  nations  in  the  wake  of  the  2007-­‐09  financial  crises.  
International   A  nation’s  stock  of  foreign  currency  and  gold  
reserves  
Inventories   These  consist  of  materials  and  supplies  which  are  stored  for  use  in  production,  work-­‐
in  progress,  finished  goods  and  goods  for  re-­‐sale  
Investment   Spending  on  capital  goods  including  plant  &  machinery  and  infrastructure  
Investment  income   Interest,  profits  and  dividends  from  assets  owned  and  located  overseas  
Job  search   The  process  by  which  workers  find  appropriate  jobs  given  their  tastes  and  skills  
Page  165     www.tutor2u.net  
 
 
Keynesian   The  economics  of  John  Maynard  Keynes.  The  belief  that  the  state  can  directly  
economics   stimulate  demand  in  a  stagnating  economy.  For  instance,  by  borrowing  money  to  
fund  public  works  projects  like  new  roads,  housing,  schools  and  hospitals  
Keynesian   Unemployment  caused  by  a  lack  of  aggregate  demand  in  the  economy  –  a  deficiency  
unemployment   of  private  sector  spending  causes  output  and  employment  to  contract  
Labour  shedding   Cut  backs  in  employment  often  seen  in  a  slowdown  or  a  recession  
Labour  shortages   When  businesses  find  it  difficult  to  recruit  the  workers  they  need  
Labour  supply   The  number  of  people  able,  available  and  willing  to  work  at  prevailing  wage  rates  
Lagging  indicators   Indicators  which  tend  to  follow  economic  cycles  e.g.  unemployment  
Leading  indicators   Indicators  which  predict  future  economic  trends  e.g.  consumer  confidence  
Leveraging   The  use  of  borrowed  funds  to  increase  your  capacity  to  spend  or  invest  
Liquidity   The  ease  with  which  something  can  be  converted  to  cash  with  little  loss  of  value  
Liquidity  trap   When  very  low  interest  rates  cease  to  have  a  strong  effect  on  aggregate  demand  
Macroeconomic   The  overall  performance  in  terms  of  output,  prices,  jobs,  trade  and  living  standards.    
performance  
Propensity  to   The  proportion  of  any  change  in  income  that  is  spent  rather  than  saved  
consume  
Propensity  to  save   The  change  in  total  saving  as  a  result  of  a  change  in  income  
Marginal  rate  of   The  rate  of  tax  on  the  next  unit  (£1)  of  income  earned  
tax  
Monetary  Policy   Bank  of  England  committee  of  9  people  meets  every  month  to  set  interest  rates.    
Committee  (MPC)  
Monetary  stimulus   Changes  in  monetary  policy  designed  to  increase  aggregate  demand  including  lower  
policy  interest  rates  and  measures  to  increase  the  supply  of  credit  
Money  supply   The  entire  quantity  of  a  country's  commercial  bills,  coins,  loans  and  credit  
Multiplier  effect   If  there  is  an  initial  injection  (e.g.  a  rise  in  exports)  into  the  economy  then  the  final  
increase  in  aggregate  demand  and  real  GDP  will  be  greater.  
NAFTA   North  American  Free  Trade  Agreement  signed  in  1994  involving  US,  Canada  &  Mexico  
National  debt   A  government's  total  outstanding  debt  -­‐  effectively  what  the  government  still  owes  
from  the  budget  deficits  accumulated  over  time  
Negative  equity   When  the  value  of  an  asset  falls  below  the  debt  left  to  pay  on  that  asset.  Term  is  most  
commonly  used  in  connection  with  property  prices  after  a  slump  in  prices  
Negative  interest   An  interest  rate  that  is  below  zero.  For  real  interest  rates,  this  can  occur  when  the  
rate   inflation  rate  is  higher  than  nominal  interest  rates  
Net  investment   Gross  investment  minus  an  estimate  for  capital  depreciation  
Net  inward   When  the  number  of  migrants  coming  into  a  country  is  greater  than  those  leaving  
migration  
Net  trade   The  balance  between  the  value  of  exports  and  imports  
Nominal  GDP   Monetary  value  of  all  goods  and  services  produced  expressed  at  current  prices  
Nominal  wage   The  annual  growth  of  wages  unadjusted  for  inflation  

Page  166     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
growth  
Non-­‐inflationary   Sustained  growth  of  real  national  output  whilst  maintaining  price  stability  
growth  
Output  gap   Difference  between  actual  and  potential  national  output.  A  negative  output  gap  
means  that  an  economy  has  a  large  margin  of  spare  productive  capacity  
Output  measure   Value  of  the  goods  and  services  produced  by  all  sectors  of  the  economy;  agriculture,  
GDP   manufacturing,  energy,  construction,  the  service  sector  and  government  
Overseas  assets   Assets  such  as  businesses,  shares,  property  which  are  owned  in  overseas  countries  
and  which  might  generate  a  flow  of  income  which  is  a  credit  item  on  the  current  
accot  
Paradox  of  thrift   If  people  save  more  in  a  recession,  it  will  reduce  consumption  and  thus  AD  will  fall,  
impeding  economic  growth  and,  eventually,  lowering  the  general  level  of  savings  
Patent  box   A  reduced  rate  of  Corporation  Tax  applied  to  profits  from  patents  –  designed  to  
stimulate  research  and  innovation  and  improve  the  supply-­‐side  of  the  economy  
Peak   The  high  point  of  the  economic  cycle  beyond  which  a  recession  starts  
Pension  Fund   Fund  that  pools  employees'  pension  benefits  and  holds  them  so  that  they  can  be  paid  
at  retirement.  The  money  is  invested  in  stocks,  bonds  and  other  assets  to  boost  
returns  and  ensure  that  there  are  sufficient  funds  to  be  paid  out  
Per  capita  incomes   Income  per  head  of  the  population  –  a  measure  of  average  living  standards  
Phillips  Curve   A  statistical  relationship  between  unemployment  and  inflation  
Precautionary   Saving  because  of  fears  of  a  loss  of  real  income  or  employment  
saving  
Price  stability   Price  stability  occurs  when  there  is  low  inflation  and  the  price  changes  that  do  occur  
have  little  impact  on  day-­‐to-­‐day  decisions  of  people  
Productive   Productive  capacity  of  the  economy  –  boosted  by  high  quality  investment  
potential  
Productivity   A  measure  of  efficiency  e.g.  output  per  person  employed  or  output  per  person-­‐hour  
Propensity  to   Proportion  of  any  change  in  income  that  is  spent  on  overseas  products  
import  
Propensity  to  save   Proportion  of  any  change  in  income  that  is  saved  rather  than  spent  
Protectionism   Restricting  trade  through  tariffs  and  other  forms  of  import  controls  
Purchasing  power   The  buying  power  of  a  unit  of  currency.  It  is  inversely  related  to  the  rate  of  inflation  
Quantitative   The  introduction  of  new  money  into  the  national  supply  by  a  central  bank  
easing  
Quota   A  physical  limit  on  the  quantity  of  a  good  that  can  be  imported  into  a  country  
Real  disposable   Income  after  taxes  and  welfare  benefits,  adjusted  for  the  effects  of  inflation  
income  
Real  income   Nominal  income  adjusted  for  price  changes,  expressed  at  constant  prices  
Real  interest  rate   Nominal  rate  of  interest  adjusted  for  inflation  
Real  wage   Nominal  wage  adjusted  for  the  effects  of  inflation  
Recession   A  period  of  at  least  six  months  when  an  economy  suffers  a  fall  in  output.  Or  a  

Page  167     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
broadly-­‐based  contraction  in  output,  employment,  investment  and  confidence  
Recovery   A  phase  of  the  economic  cycle,  after  a  recession/depression,  during  which  real  GDP  
starts  to  increase  and  unemployment  begins  to  fall  
Redundancy   Making  someone  redundant  is  to  end  their  employment  
Relative  deflation   An  economy  with  an  inflation  rate,  which  is  lower  than  comparable  economies.  Over  
time,  a  low  relative  rate  of  inflation  can  lead  to  improved  competitiveness  
Remittances   Sending  of  money  to  people  in  another  country.  For  many  lower-­‐income  nations,  
remittance  income  is  now  a  big  contribution  to  Gross  National  Income  (GNI)  
Risk  averse   Exhibiting  a  dislike  of  uncertainty,  often  seen  in  a  recession  
Saving  ratio   The  percentage  of  disposable  income  that  is  saved  rather  than  spent  
Slowdown   A  fall  in  the  rate  of  growth  of  an  economy  but  not  a  full-­‐scale  recession  
Slump   A  sustained  decrease  in  real  GDP  and  a  persistent  rise  in  unemployment  
Soft  landing   A  slowdown  in  economic  activity  but  which  does  not  result  in  a  recession  
Sovereign  debt   Debt  issued  by  or  guaranteed  by  a  government  
Spare  capacity   When  a  business  is  not  making  full  use  of  its  available  capacity  –  there  are  spare  
factors  of  production  including  land,  labour  and  capital.  When  an  economy  has  plenty  
of  spare  capacity,  short  run  aggregate  supply  tends  to  be  elastic.  
Stagflation   A  combination  of  slow  growth  and  rising  inflation.  The  most  notable  recent  period  of  
stagflation  occurred  during  the  1970s,  when  world  oil  prices  rose  dramatically,  and  
UK  inflation  rose  at  one  point  to  nearly  30  per  cent  
Sterling  exchange   External  value  of  sterling  calculated  using  a  weighted  index  of  a  basket  of  currencies  –  
rate  index   weightings  are  based  on  the  value  of  trade  with  different  countries  
Stimulus   Monetary  policy  and/or  fiscal  policy  aimed  at  encouraging  higher  growth  and/or  
inflation.  This  can  include  interest  rate  cuts,  quantitative  easing,  tax  cuts  and  
government  spending  increases  
Structural  budget   The  size  of  a  fiscal  (budget)  deficit  adjusted  to  take  account  of  the  effects  of  changes  
deficit   in  the  economic  cycle  
Structural  trade   A  trade  deficit  that  arises  due  to  supply-­‐side  weaknesses  rather  than  a  change  in  GDP  
deficit   or  currency  –  caused  by  poor  competitiveness  
Structural   Unemployment  that  results  from  the  decline  in  n  industry  which  leaves  people  
unemployment   unemployed  because  they  do  not  have  the  skills  needed  by  industries  that  are  
growing  
Sustainable  growth   Growth  that  meets  the  needs  of  the  present  without  compromising  the  ability  of  
future  generations  to  meet  their  own  needs.  Growth  that  can  continue  without  
damage  to  the  environment,  or  the  exhaustion  of  non-­‐renewable  resources  
Target   A  target  is  an  objective  of  government  policy  e.g.  low  inflation  
Tariff   A  tax  on  imported  products  that  may  be  ad  valorem  (%)  or  a  specific  tax  (a  set  
amount  per  unit  imported).    
Tight  labour   When  demand  for  labour  is  high  and  there  are  shortages  of  labour.  Businesses  may  
market   have  to  offer  higher  wages  to  attract  and  keep  the  workers  they  need  
Time  lags   The  time  it  takes  for  one  change  e.g.  a  change  in  interest  rates  to  affect  other  
variables  e.g.  consumer  confidence  and  spending  

Page  168     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 
Trade  deficit   A  trade  deficit  occurs  when  a  country  imports  a  greater  value  of  goods  and  services  
than  it  exports.  A  trade  deficit  as  a  net  withdrawal  from  the  circular  flow  of  income  
Trade-­‐off   A  trade-­‐off  implies  that  choices  have  to  be  made  between  different  objectives  of  
economic  policy  for  example  a  trade-­‐of  between  economic  growth  and  inflation  
Transmission   How  a  change  in  interest  rates  affects  the  various  sectors  of  the  economy  
mechanism  
Trend  growth   The  long  run  average  growth  rate  –  mainly  determined  by  changes  in  the  stock  of  
available  factor  inputs  and  also  improvements  in  productivity.  Trend  growth  is  
represented  by  a  rightward  shift  in  the  LRAS  (or  PPC  boundary)  
Trough   The  low  point  of  the  economic  cycle  beyond  which  a  recovery  starts  
Twin  Deficits   Twin  deficits  refer  to  a  situation  where  an  economy  is  running  both  a  fiscal  deficit  and  
also  a  deficit  on  the  current  account  of  the  balance  of  payments  
Under-­‐ Workers  are  underemployed  when  they  are  willing  to  supply  more  hours  of  work  
employment   than  their  employers  are  prepared  to  offer.  
Unemployment   When  the  prospect  of  the  loss  of  unemployment  benefits  dissuades  those  without  
trap   work  from  taking  a  new  job  –  creates  a  disincentives  problem  
Unit  wage  costs   Labour  costs  per  unit  of  output  
Unsecured  credit   Credit  not  secured  by  another  asset  –  i.e.  money  borrowed  on  credit  cards  
Wage  price  spiral   Where  workers  bid  for  higher  wages  because  they  have  seen  their  real  income  
eroded  by  rising  prices.  This  can  lead  to  a  further  burst  of  cost-­‐push  inflation    
Wealth  effect   The  supposed  link  between  changes  in  wealth  and  household  spending  
World  Bank   A  source  of  financial  and  technical  assistance  to  developing  countries.  It  can  provide  
loans  and  grants  for  a  wide  array  of  purposes  that  include  investments  in  education,  
health,  public  administration,  infrastructure,  financial  and  private  sector  
development,  agriculture  and  environmental  and  natural  resource  management  
World  Trade   WTO  oversees  trade  agreements,  negotiations  and  disputes  between  member  
Organisation   countries.  The  WTO  is  an  organisation  that  was  formed  in  1995  to  control  trade  
agreements  between  countries  and  to  set  rules  on  international  trade.  It  replaced  
GATT(the  General  Agreement  on  Tariffs  and  Trade)  
Zero  Hours   An  employment  contract  under  which  the  employee  is  not  guaranteed  work  and  is  
Contract   paid  only  for  work  carried  out  
Zombie  Companies   Weak  and  inefficient  companies  which  are  able  to  survive  thanks  to  low  interest  rates  
and  a  supposedly  more  tolerant  attitude  to  corporate  borrowers  by  banks.  
 
 
 

Page  169     www.tutor2u.net  


 
 

You might also like